Home

User Manual of GK600 Series General Purpose AC Motor Drives

1. Open collector NPN connection 24V 24V External Drive 3 3V Controller Jumper T PLC COM at a ae ee n lt lt p OC a 1 x1 f HE GND PA 3 3V fun i eo EE OC 6 d X6 DI l J GND i Shielded Cable Near end Ground Fig 3 17 Internal power supply open collector NPN connection 24V 24V External ape lt Drive 3 3V Controller L1 Ge een COM a el A POBRE OC 1 X1 Ee EN GND 3 3V e mA OC aL 6 ____4 X6 D uy i SAT M GND ES la a Shielded Cable Near end Ground Fig 3 18 External power supply open collector NPN connection ATTENTION When external power supply is used the jumper between 24V and PLC must be removed The voltage range of external power supply should be DC20 30V otherwise normal operation could not be assured and or hazard of equipment damage exists 40 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Open collector PNP connection External gp 24V Contr
2. Braking DC Reactor Resistor Y Y Y Circuit Braker Contactor 2 2 gt T i 1 Jumper 2 B1 B2 p r R L1 U T16G Three phase p cT ma Power Supply 7 S L2 V T2 380V 480V i oe ae E zy 50 60Hz pe no gom on aL GK600 uL Hii Q C9O 3 Motor u Gs a qur OE 24V PLC Digital In 1 GUM Digital In 2 A Digital In 3 Digital In 4 x3 sal Digital In 5 X4 Expansion Board Interface Digital In 6 AS X6 DI Compatible for Pulse In 485 Moccia 485 MODBUS 485 0 Communication A P o 10V Analog In Reference GND Analog In Volt DC 0 10V 0 20mA POT AH Md GND RA Relay Output RB 250V AC 3A Analog In AI RC 30V DC 3A DC 10V 10V x x GND 24V e7 1 Open Collector Output 1 Y16 Analog Out AO1 485 Al1 AO1 DC 0 10V 0 20mA AIX ot 1 Open Collector Output 2 GND Y2 DO gt High speed Pulse Output LL COM OFF V V XX Paired Shielded Cable Cable Fig 3 13 Wiring diagram 35 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 8 Control Terminal Specification Table 3 5 Control terminal specification Category Terminal Terminal Specification designation 0 Analog input tN E22 10V Analog input reference Maximum output current 25mA voltage The resistance of external potentiometer should be larger than 4000 GND Analog gr
3. The master The master is PC is PC RS232 232 485 CNV module RS485 RS485 Drive 1 Drive 2 sesse Drive n Drive 1 Drive2 Drive n Single master multiple slaves networking diagram The master The master is PC is PC RS232 232 485 CNV module RS485 RS485 Drive Drive Single master single slave networking diagram 2 Interface Mode RS485 or RS232 interface asynchronous semiduplex Default data format 8 N 2 8 data bits no check two stop bits 9600 bps See parameters of Group HO for parameter setting 3 Communication Mode 1 Drive is used as a slave for master slave point to point communication When master 238 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol sends commands using broadcast address the slave does not respond 2 Native address baud rate and data format of inverter are set through slave operating panel or serial communication 3 Slave reports the current fault information in the latest response frame for master polling 4 Drive employs RS 485 interface mode 4 Protocol Format Modbus protocol supports both RTU and ASCII mode RTU data frame format is shown as the figure below RTU data frame format Modbus message ee p
4. OC 24V gt 24V Y1 Y2 DO i com Pull up Resistor C D 30V Drive Drive a Internal power supply b External power supply Fig 3 21 Wiring when Y1 and Y2 DO output with pull up resistor ATTENTION When set to be pulse output Y2 DO terminal shall output 0 50kHz pulse signal 24V 24V py 24V 2 py t24V Li 5V IN 5V Y1 Y2 DO f i Y1 Y2 DO i eS 30V OC Relay OC Relay e L4 mI e LA IM COM COM Drive Drive a Internal power supply b External power supply Fig 3 22 Wiring when Y1 and Y2 DO drive relay ATTENTION When relay coil voltage is lower than 24V a resistor as voltage divider should be mounted between relay and output terminal based on coil impedance Wiring instruction of relay output terminal Control board of GK600 series drive is provided with a group of programmable relay dry contact outputs RA RB RC are relay contacts RA and RB are normally closed while RA and RC are normally open See parameter C1 02 for details ATTENTION In case inductive load e g electromagnetic relay or contactor is to be driven a surge voltage absorbing circuit such as RC absorbing circuit note that
5. Al1 Input AM x Drive AI2 BUDE GND i Fig 6 3 If 10V power supply inside the drive is used with potentiometer the connection diagram is shown as Fig 6 4 Note that the toggle switch should be switched to voltage input side 10V Drive Adjustable Al i Resistor Ci 1 2 GND Fig 6 4 5 X6 DI pulse input If this parameter value selected command frequency will be determined by pulse frequency input via terminal X6 DI only In such a case C0 06 should be set to 24 Corresponding relation between pulse frequency and command frequency is specified in C2 24 C2 27 6 Process PID output Command frequency is determined by process closed loop PID computation result See parameter Group FO for details 7 PLC Command frequency is determined by simple PLC See parameter Group F2 for details 8 Multi step speed A total of 16 step speed settings can be realized through status combination of multi step frequency terminal 1 4 See the table below for details Command frequency can be switched via different combination of multi step frequency terminals no matter in running or in stop 113 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Table 6 4 Multi step Multi step Multi step Multi step frequency frequency frequency frequency Command Frequency terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 F 1 00 F1 01 F1 04 F1 05 O O O O O TI TI O Z O o i ae O F1 F
6. Pre wobble frequency holding time Wobble frequency cycle F3 06 Run command Stop command Fig 6 55 a is the set Accel time ramp up time and d is the set Decel time ramp down time F3 00 Wobble frequency function setting Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Wobble frequency function disabled 1 Wobble frequency function enabled F3 01 Wobble frequency running setting Range 0000 1111 ee Unit s place started method 0 Automatically Run at pre frequency of wobble frequency set by F3 02 maintain Pre frequency holding time set by F3 03 and then automatically get into wobble frequency running Started by terminal Digital input terminal start wobble frequency controls the running of wobble frequency When terminal inputs ON the drive gets into wobble frequency running When terminal inputs OFF the drive exits wobble frequency and runs at pre frequency of wobble frequency Under this mode Pre frequency holding time is enabled Decade amplitude control 0 Relative to center frequency Amplitude F3 04 x current command frequency 1 Relative to maximum frequency 210 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Amplitude F3 04 x maximum frequency b0 08 Hundreds place wobble frequency memorized when stop 0 Memory enabled The drive memorizes the current wobble frequency state when stop When restarted drive continues to run the wobble
7. sessessesssseeenemee nennen 179 Group d4 V f Control Parameters of Motor 2 ccccceccceeeseeeeeseeeeeseeeteeseeeeneeeees 181 Group d5 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 2 ccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeteeenees 182 Group E Enhancement Function and Protection Parameters 183 Group EO Enhancement FUPCEOFL iaa cnkosixi dian msi cerra ranks nga ia i C ic aa ac ee 183 Group ET Protection Parameters cise cccicivsntwcacvindenaaddaihiieandsscdeatadsednscciinaiecdesdaiacentes 187 Group F PAC AU OU arsenate ge etd du Senne tee ot Mec a e ERE RM EU E 191 Group FO iie sii PN Umm 191 Group F1 Multi step Frequency ccccccccsecccesecceeeeseeeeseeeeeesseeeesaeeeseeeseaeeeaes 197 OUP F Simple a or een enn ene a eee 200 Group F3 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count 209 Group H Communication Parameters a 12 oec nisu retro pha en oben He rea bed rebes 213 Group HO MODBUS Communication Parameters ccccccseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeetees 213 Group L Keys and Display of Keypad cccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeseusesseseesaeeseeeees 215 Group LO Keys of IKGVDSEl onsec sonis tra MER ako CRM m HR aue PER Vasa ERR RE Rd Pbd n 215 Group LI LED Display SEU is cda ene ta ptio ehbnaquRE nO mURAU AF RISRO RR Et pH PMAd DER T IEUE 216 Group U eere REN o TT 219 Group U0 Status MORDIEOLIIO se isosbr iet Ree tr PR ERE MEN
8. 1 Chapter 1 Safety Precautions ccccccccccseceeccneeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaueeeaaueesaaueessaeeeesaeneesaanes 1 1 1 Safety Considerations x rcxtexterspex tic unit d bora DG RENI GUNE EU AT EN Ho REN ENDE REIN EORR RE d adE 1 1 2 Other Considerations TEM EL ER 9 Chapter 2 Product Information ccccccccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeeeseeees T 2 1 Model Explanatio e serre E OE rate 7 2 2 Nameplate IDMOFHTIBtOEIase d ete seek bea oue ada EM Hanse fane bint One p EAR E Raid quen ives 7 23 information of Product Mogel occcenddccecqasentedcevceadacensdaancdadtsccntedessionsemmnansvondleeteeadendeuerees 8 2 4 Technical Features of GK600 0 cece cc cece cc ee cece cece cee ee ceaeeeeceaeeeseaeeeeeeeeesseeeees 10 Pen At ON VIN TRO 13 2 6 Appearance Mounting Dimensions and Weight seseseseessssssse 14 2 7 External Dimensions of Keypad ssssssssssssssesseeeeeee 17 2 8 External Dimensions of Keypad Bracket cccccecccseceeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseuseseeeesaees 17 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring cccccc cece ceeccceeeeeee cece eeseeeeseeeesaeeeseeeesaeeeseeeeees 18 eM SEAM OVI EVIFOD PIE ra seeps ntu deat qb er eect oa nante enna ea mU ERE 18 3 2 Minimum Mounting Clearances ric sic2escnssiesdaseete dp ctete atts ete Eua p pre bbb eb mdi o caeno nit bie 18 3 3 Remove amp Mount Keypad and Cover
9. ccccscccsseccsseceeseseeeeecaseceueeseusesaeeessaeessaes 20 3 4 Configuration of Peripheral Devices ccccccccsececeeecceecaeeeecaeeecseesssessueeesaeessaes 25 3 5 Terminal Configuration sedriserctussseacauiiedte art lienate ots tuno uo ceh che tie toni men ei tac cen dus ensdides 28 3 6 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring iiuie eorr rre ers eae p base trt nire nest 28 3 7 Control Terminal Wiring usciti epe ente ee ferebant Fr ere on bee saa t ri vebe x stu YN E UEeEpEDUE 33 3 8 Control Terminal Specification saieen aio ies tod vac S etos a oe ue eb sts oeasedeSesadendedyaceuenotsendsees 36 3 9 Control Terminal SAO sese te dando eer I Sd aen IRR ee a DUET enun or 3 10 Instruction OF Signal SWINCICS scricnsccceasccusodecnecsancesindexmsnvasne ted ceenescemswencheousrdesaacominrdes 43 3 11 EMI SolutionS RENE RRE 43 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions ccc cccccccccceeceeeeeeseeesaeeeeaeeesaaeesaees 46 4 1 Operation of Keypad abscess dete ve eed seceded eee pot eet ede 46 4 2 Initial POWGF UD set eccceccarrencantinancencseaccane testes ME RM U EEE ER AANER a 62 Chapter 5 List of Parameters ssssssssssesssseeneenennenenn ener nnn nnns 63 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters sesssesseesseeeeemeennen nn 104 GroupA System Parameter and Parameter Management cc cccceccseeeeeseeeeeneeees 104 Group AO System Parameters
10. Ground terminal PE 30 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 6 3 Main Circuit Terminals of GK600 4T110G 132L GK600 4T400G 450L Designation and function of terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC input terminals 1 O2 DC reactor connection terminals Connected with a jumper as factory default e2 DC input terminals of externally mounted brake unit DC power supply input terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals 31 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 6 4 Terminal Screw and Wiring Requirement Table 3 4 Terminal screw and wiring requirement Power terminal Ground terminal Drive model een Screw nen Screw E 25 Ww was 25 M was GKG004T37G 5SLB 4 m4 14 05 4 ma 14 05 Gkew rssors 6 ma mos a Ma ios Gkeo4rzsonus 6 m mos 6 Ma 14 05 GKe00 4T1IG SLB 6 M5 28 05 6 M5 28 05 VETT Nm E E EWNM a GKG00 4T18 5G 22L B 10 me 48 05 10 me 48 05 GKG00 T22G 30L B 16 me 48 05 16 me 48 05 eeooareocerue 2s we sas e we T anos 3 25 M8 120205 GK600 4T45G 55L B 35 ma 120 05 25 M8 120105 ee ee 25 mio 3 M10 250205 25 Gkeooareocmo 7o mio 260205 35 mro 25005 COTTE E E MAIOR ee M12 4 GK600 4T160G 185L 185 M12 40 05 95 m12 cxoosriescia0n 20 wre ees 120 miz GKG00 4T220G 250L
11. Unlock keypad To unlock keypad press 56 MN simultaneously Unlocking won t 60 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions change the value of parameter LO 01 In other words keypad will be locked again if the condition of locking keypad fulfilled To unlock keypad completely LO 01 value must be modified to O after momentary unlocked Refer to flow chart 4 16 of unlocking keypad 50 00 ES AO 00 SD A 0 00 CA D L0 00 LO 02 CESO 50 00 CL ESCHENT A gt PrtCt 50 00 Fig 4 15 Flow chart of locking keypad Fig 4 16 Flow chart of unlocking keypad 61 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual 4 2 Initial Power up Perform wiring in strict accordance with technical requirements as set forth in Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Flow chart of Initial power up is shown below Make sure power lines are connected to R S T Make sure motor lines are connected with U V W A0 03 3 restored to factory default ariable frequency motor Set parameters d0 01 d0 06 according to motor nameplate Set MF key to JOG forward LO 00 1 Press MF key to JOG If motor rotation direction incorrect turn off the power supply and exchange any two phases of the motor lines then power up again Static identification Rotating Static identification or identification rotating identification d0 22 1 d0 22 2 Press RUN key and wait till the finish of i
12. t 4 5 h 4 bh 4 hb 4 h T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 I 9 TO T1 T2 T3 T4 PLC step completed Pulse length 500ms EN PLC cycle completed MEM Run command Fig 6 52 Decade power loss memory 0 Memory disabled on power loss The drive does not memorize PLC running status on power loss and starts the running from step O after power up again 1 Memory enabled on power loss The drive saves PLC running status on power loss including the running step running frequency and finished running time at the moment of power loss After the next power up the running will be continued in accordance with the memorized status Hundreds place started mode 0 Run from the first step multi step frequency 0 When restarted after stop the drive will start to run from step O 1 Continue to run from the step of stop or fault At the moment drive stop the drive automatically records the running time of current step When restarted the drive will gets into this step continue to run the remanent time with the frequency of this step shown as Fig 6 53 202 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Output frequency Coast to stop when fault d2 Time I Runtime Run Run time Remanent Run time ofstepO timeof ofstep2 time of of step 3 step 1 Step2 LE lo LLL Run com
13. ATTENTION When broken line Accel Decel is enabled Accel Decel time determinant 1 and Accel Decel time determinant 2 will be disabled Broken line Accel Decel is as shown in Fig 6 13 Output frequency Time I 450p age ta Accel time Accel time Decel time Decel time Fig 6 13 t1 b2 03 x b2 13 b0 08 t2 2 b2 01 x f b2 13 b0 08 t3 b2 02 x f b2 14 b0 08 t4 b2 04 x b2 14 b0 08 f is current frequency command and b0 08 is maximum frequency 2 S curve Accel Decel A By adding a period of S curve time to the initial and ending segments of Accel Decel it can 130 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters improve the smoothness of start stop and prevent mechanical impact See Fig 6 14 Output frequency Time Fig 6 14 Accel Decel rate changes gradually at the initial and ending segments of S curve time At the middle segment of S curve it is linear Accel Decel rate which is determined by enabled Accel Decel time 1 4 Therefore the actual Accel Decel time is longer than linear Accel Decel if this parameter value is selected Actual Accel time linear Accel time Time of initial segment of Accel S curve Time of last segment of Accel S curve 2 Actual Decel time linear Decel time Time of initial segment of Decel S curve Time of last segment of Decel S curve 2 Example Assuming that the maximum frequency b0 08 is 50Hz and the Accel time set is 6s the linear Accel
14. 150x2 M12 4480 5 150 M12 4 eese se mie woos we wa 4 GKG00 T280G 315L 185x2 M12 440805 95x2 M12 4 GKG00 T315G 355L 250x2_ m16 6900 5 125x2 M16 6 m16 Dwe M6 wa s GK600 4T355G 400L 325x2 690x0 5 185x2 690x0 5 GK600 4T400G 450L 325x2 690 0 5 185x2 482 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 7 Control Terminal Wiring Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives are allowed to implement wiring Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personnel injury even death Wiring should be in strict accordance with this manual otherwise hazard of electric shock or equipment damage exists Make sure input power supply has been completely disconnected before wiring operation Failure to comply will result in personnel injury even death All wiring operations and lines should comply with EMC and national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The conductor diameter should be in accordance with recommendations of this manual Otherwise hazard of equipment damage fire and or personnel injury exists Screws or bolts for terminal wiring must be screwed tightly AC 220V signal is prohibited from connecting to other terminals than control terminals RA RB and RC N ATTENTION Signal wires should to the best of possibility be away from main power lines If this cannot be ensured vertical cross arrangement should be
15. C0 13 Delay time of terminal X2 0 0s 3600 0s Unit s place X1 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic oe i Hundreds place X3 same as unit s place Thousands place X4 same as unit s place 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic C0 15 l i terminal same as unit s place Hundreds place on IO expansion board same as unit s place Unit s place Al 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic dis i Hundreds place EAI on IO expansion board same as unit s place Thousands place reserved Decade action on power loss C0 17 ORNA UP DOWN frequency Glas adjustment treatment 1 Holding Hundreds place integral function 0 No integral function 1 Integral function enabled 72 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P D arameter esignation Scope default Attr Teri co 48 Terminal UP DOWN frequency p O0Hz s 100 00Hz s change step size 0 Two wire mode 1 1 Two wire mode 2 C0 19 FWD REV terminal control mode 2 Three wire mode 1 3 Three wire mode 2 000 77F 0 Actual terminal in effect 1 Virtual terminal in effect Unit s place BITO BIT3 X1 X4 C0 20 Option of virtual input terminal Decade BIT4 BIT6 X5 X6 EX Hundreds place BIT8 BIT10 Al1 AI2 EAI EX and EAI on IO expansion board Group C1 Digital Output C1 00 Y1 output function 0 No output Y2 DO output function when used 1 Drive undervoltage C1 01 l as Y2 2 Drive running preparation C1 02 Control board relay o
16. C2 03 Al analoa Maximum input of curve 1 C2 01 curve 1 C2 04 curve 1 C2 04 Pi Minimum Maximum analog r input of curve input of curve 1 C2 03 1 C2 01 Fig 6 25 Fig 6 26 Corresponding set value Set value that corresponds to minimum input of curve 1 C2 04 Set value that corresponds to maximum input of curve 1 C2 02 Minimum Maximum input of curve input of curve 1 C2 03 1 C2 01 Fig 6 27 Maximum input of curve 2 Set value corresponding to maximum input of curve 2 Input of inflection point A of curve 2 Set value corresponding to input of inflection point A of curve 2 analog Corresponding set value Set value that corresponds to minimum input of curve 1 C2 04 Set value that input of curve corresponds to 1 C2 03 maximum input of curve 1 C2 02 Range input of inflection point A of curve 2 110 0 Range 100 096 100 096 Input of inflection point B of curve 2 maximum input of curve 2 Range 100 096 100 096 156 Maximum input of curve 1 C2 01 Factory default 100 0 Factory default 100 0 Factory default 0 0 Factory default 0 0 GK600 User Manual Input of inflection point B of curve 2 Set value corresponding to input of inflection point B of curve 2 Minimum input of curve 2 Set value corresponding to Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Range minimum input of curve 2 Input o
17. EAI on expansion board and Al1 can select 0 10V voltage input or O 20mA current input by jumper If O 10V is selected OV corresponds to 0 while 10V corresponds to 100 If 0 20mA is selected OmA corresponds to 0 while 20mA corresponds to 100 AI2 only supports 10V 10V input for AI2 10V corresponds to 100 while 10V corresponds to 100 Corresponding set values C2 02 and C2 04 When the corresponding set value is frequency 10096 is the maximum frequency while 100 is the maximum negative frequency When the corresponding set value is current 100 means 2 times the rated current of drive while less than or equal to 096 corresponds to zero current When corresponding set value is torque 10096 means 2 times the rated torque while 100 means negative 2 times the rated torque When the corresponding set value is output voltage e g the voltage setting in case of V f separated pattern 100 corresponds to rated voltage of motor Less than or equal to 0 corresponds to OV voltage Curve diagram is shown as below 155 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Corresponding set value Set value that corresponds to maximum input of curve 1 C2 02 Set value that corresponds to minimum input of GK600 User Manual Corresponding set value A Set value that corresponds to maximum input of curve 1 C2 02 curve 1 Set value that corresponds to minimum input of Minimum input of
18. User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 13 A0 00 M 13 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 14 A0 00 A444 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 15 A0 00 M 15 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 16 A0 00 A1 16 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U 1 26 Factory default parameter 17 A0 00 M 17 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U 1 26 Factory default parameter 18 A0 00 A1 18 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 19 A0 00 A1 19 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 20 A0 00 A1 00 A1 19 set values would not take effect unless AO 01 is set to 2 Setting range of thousands place A b C d E F H L U Setting range of hundreds place 0 9 Setting range of decade 0 9 Setting range of unit s place 0 9 Example To exclusively display function codes A0 00 AO 01 b0 01 E0 01 and FO 01 it is merely necessary to set A1 00 to b0 01 A1 01 to E0 01 A1 02 to F0 01 and A1 03 A1 19 to 00 00 and then set A0 01 to 2 Parameter group displa Factory default A1 20 nc ML allRonde 00002 REFE y hide characteristic 1 FFFF Parameter group displa Factory default A1 21 gree HISP Range 0000 FFFF y hide characteristic 2 FFFF When AO0 01 is set to 0 to display all parameters only the parameters whose bit corresponding
19. Y auxiliary frequency 2 Max master auxiliary 3 Min master auxiliary b0 08 Maximum frequency Upper limit frequency 600 00Hz 90 00Hz L limit b0 09 Upper limit frequency PANAN KEGURNEY s IRRAINUM 50 00Hz b0 10 Lower limit frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 00Hz Operation when command 0 Run at lower limit frequency b0 11 frequency lower than lower limit 1 Run at 0 Hz x frequency 2 Stop Time del f boo ee ay SOP ene nman eeen os 00s x frequency lower than lower limit 67 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory D Attr esignation Scope deaur frequency EE ee b0 13 Lower limit of skip frequency band 0 00Hz upper limit frequency O 00Hz x b0 14 A Upper limit of skip frequency band DOOR upper E oe ee b0 15 Lower limit of skip frequency band zo UHE pper mtt tons EN ES Ea Parameter b0 16 Upper limit of skip frequency band 20 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 00Hz b0 17 Lower limit of skip frequency band 30 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 00Hz b0 18 Upper limit of skip frequency band 30 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 00Hz b0 19 Jog frequency 0 00Hz upper limit frequency Group b1 Start Stop Control 0 Keypad control b1 00 Run command 1 Terminal control 2 Communication control Unit s place frequency command source bundled under keypad control 0 No binding 1 Digital setting b0 02 A V adjustment on keypad 2 Digital setting b0 02 terminal
20. b0 08 x b0 06 When PID is selected for auxiliary frequency command the frequency that corresponds to maximum value of PID output should be b0 08 x b0 06 PID output diagrammatic sketch is as shown in Fig 6 6 Frequency output b0 08 x b0 06 PID output 0 Maximum value Fig 6 6 When b0 05 is set to 1 relative to master frequency When Al1 Al2 EAI or X6 DI pulse input is selected for auxiliary frequency command source the frequency that corresponds to maximum value of these sources should be master frequency x b0 06 Example When selecting Al1 as auxiliary frequency command source set b0 03 to 3 and setting Al1 to curve 1 unit s place of C2 00 is 0 the frequency that corresponds to maximum input of curve 1 should be C2 02 x master frequency x b0 06 When X6 DI pulse input is selected as auxiliary frequency command source set b0 03 to 6 the frequency that corresponds to maximum DI input should be C2 25 x master frequency x bO 06 When PID is selected for auxiliary frequency command the frequency that corresponds to maximum value of PID output should be master frequency x b0 06 PID output diagram is as shown in Fig 6 7 118 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Frequency output Master command value x b0 06 PID output Maximum value Fig 6 7 Computation of master b0 07 d 2 Range 0 3 Factory default 0 and auxiliary frequency 0 Ma
21. e Response os 9 Read error or warning In case illegal parameter illegal register address data errors and other anomalies are detected during communication slave response communication anomaly will occur In such a case the slave response will be in the following formats Slave response Appendix Table 42 Example Parameter 10H is used here to write the corresponding write data 1 11 4 and 100 00 in control registers 0x6200 0x6201 0x6202 and 0x6203 of 5 slave Appendix Table 43 Register Number of Number of Address Parameter Data address registers data bytes Request 5 10 62 00 00 04 Me inp A 67 1 0004 2710 7 LRC CRC Generation sum D In consideration of the demand for speed improvement CRC 16 is usually realized in form mode C language source codes for realization of CRC 16 are given below Please note that the high and low bytes have been exchanged in final result that is to say the result is the CRC check sum to be sent The function of CRC16 Uint16 CRC16 const Uint16 data Uint16 len Uint16 crcValue Oxffff Uint16 i while len 257 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual crcValue data for i 0 i lt 7 i if crcValue amp 0x0001 crcValue crcValue gt gt 1 0xa001 else crcValue crcValue gt gt 1 return crcValue The table of CRC16 const unsigned short crc16 ccitt table 256
22. fN Rated Freq of the motor Accel time switching Range frequency of broken line 0 00Hz maximum Accel Decel frequency Factory default 1 00Hz Decel time switching Range Factory default frequency of broken line 0 00Hz maximum 1 00Hz Accel Decel frequency When b2 12 is set to 1 b2 01 Accel time 1 is enabled when output frequency during Accel is more than or equal to set value of b2 13 while b2 03 Accel time 2 is enabled when output frequency during Accel is less than set value of b2 13 b2 02 Decel time 1 is enabled when output frequency during Decel is more than or equal to set value of b2 14 while b2 04 Decel time 2 is enabled when output frequency during Accel is less than set value of b2 14 ATTENTION When broken line Accel Decel is selected terminals Accel Decel time determinant 1 and Accel Decel time determinant 2 will be disabled Ti f initial t of b2 15 Hd Rs d Range 0 00s 60 00s Factory default 0 20s Accel S curve 133 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Ti f last t of SS re Robur ts ana Range 0 00s 60 00s Factory default 0 20s Accel S curve Time of initial segment of b2 17 Range 0 00s 60 00s Factory default 0 20s Decel S curve Time of last t of SENTI ewe ace V ae Range 0 00s 60 00s _ Factory default 0 20s Decel S curve These four parameters are enabled when b2 12 is set to 2 P rti f initial b2 19 E CE Range 0 096 100 096 Factory de
23. fi fi Y ul D c GK600 4T110G 132L and above Fig 2 4 External dimensions 15 Chapter 2 Product Information GK600 User Manual Table 2 3 Appearance mounting dimensions and weight External and installation dimensions mm Model Weight Mounting kg hole dia J GK600 4T2 2G 3 7LB GK600 4T3 7G 5 5LB GK600 4T5 5G 7 5LB GK600 4T7 5G 11LB GK600 4T11G 15LB GK600 4T15G 18 5LB GK600 4T18 5G 22L B GK600 4T22G 30L B 5 5 GK600 4T30G 37L B GK600 4T37G A45L B GK600 4T45G 55L B GK600 4T90G 110L GK600 4T110G 132L GK600 4T132G 160L GK600 4T160G 185L GK600 4T185G 200L GK600 4T200G 220L GK600 4T220G 250L 1040 1300 1000 1252 1200 B GK600 4T250G 280L GK600 4T280G 315L GK600 4T315G 355L GK600 4T355G 400L GK600 4T400G 450L GEA ap Cre Es vel LES d 9 5 10 12 12 14 14 14 GK600 4T55G 75L 385 GK600 4T75G 90L EXE NT w ee 16 GK600 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information 2 7 External Dimensions of Keypad Keypad model of general purpose GK600 series AC motor drive is KBU BX1 whose appearance and external dimensions are shown in Fig 2 5 RUN FWD REV MON L Fig 2 5 External dimensions of
24. Factory default F3 05 Hop frequency Range 0 0 50 0 m o Hop frequency F3 05 x amplitude Factory default F3 06 Cycle of wobble frequency Range 0 1s 999 9s ane The time of the completion of a complete process of wobble frequency 211 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory default 0 0 F3 07 Triangular wave ramp up time Range 0 0 100 0 Sets the wobble frequency running time of ramp up segment Triangular wave ramp up time F3 07 x F3 06 Wobble frequency ramp down time z F3 06 triangular wave ramp up time ATTENTION gt The current wobble frequency status can be cleared by digital input terminal clear wobble frequency status in stop status gt If the output frequency exceeds upper limit frequency or lower limit frequency during the running at wobble frequency digital output terminal wobble frequency attains to upper or lower limit frequency outputs ON signal Parameters F3 08 F3 11 are for fixed length stop F3 08 Length unit Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 m 1 10m F3 09 Factory default Length setting Range 0 65535 1000 Sets the length value of fixed length stop When set to 0 fixed length stop function is enabled but the actual length is still calculated When it is detected the actual length attains this set value digital output terminal length attained will output ON signal and perform the command set by F3 11 Number of pulses per Factory defau
25. Motor load Rated load 0 Fig 6 45 Diagram of slip compensation on power generating load Range 0 00Hz maximum Factory default d1 11 Drop FREQ control frequency 0 00Hz In case several drives drive one load different drives may bear different proportion of the load Through the setting of this parameter the uniform load distribution on these drives could be attained The drive takes real time detection of its load Output frequency is automatically dropped according to the load and this parameter value reducing itself borne load proportion Parameter value of d1 11 corresponds to drop frequency with rated load d1 12 Current limitation mode Range 0 5 Factory default 1 0 Disabled 1 Set by d1 13 2 Set by Al1 3 Set by Al2 4 Set by EAI Drive output current is limited by analog input in the range of 0 200 x rated current of drive 5 Set by X6 DI Drive output current is limited by X6 DI pulse input in the range of O 200 x rated current of drive When a non zero value is set by d1 12 the current limitation is enabled When output current rises dramatically because of sharp change of load instant adjustment of output frequency will keep the output frequency below the set limitation When the load is reduced output frequency will recover promptly If the setting speed or motor load change dramatically 173 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual this function can effectively reduce over cur
26. and output phase loss 1 No protection for input phase loss protection enabled for output phase 2 Protection enabled for input phase loss no protection for output phase 3 Protection enabled both for input phase loss and output phase loss 0 Not ized aft E1 08 Fault memory after power loss i dem eq es x 1 Memorized after power loss E1 09 Times of automatic reset 0 20 NE EEG E1 10 Interval of automatic reset 2 0s 20 0s x Unit s place when undervoltage fault occurs 0 No action 1 Action enabled Decade when fault locked E1 11 Relay action on drive fault 0 No action 010 1 Action enabled Hundreds place interval of automatic reset 0 No action 1 Action enabled 0 Aut E1 12 Cooling fan control MU 1 Always run E1 13 Drive thermal alarm threshold 0 0 C 100 0 C 70 0 C Group F Application Group FO Process PID 0 FO 01 digital setting 1 AI 2 AI2 RE d 3 EAI on IO expansion board 4 X6 DI pulse input 5 Communication FO 01 PID digital setting 0 0 100 0 50 0 0 AM F0 02 PID feedback 1 A2 NM 87 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory A Parameter Designation Scope default EAI on IO expansion board AI1 AI2 AI1 AI2 Max Al1 Al2 Min AI1 Al2 X6 DI pulse input Communication Unit s place output frequency 0 Must be the same direction as setting running direction 1 Opposite direction allowed F0 03 PID adjustment Decade integration sel
27. b0 03 determines auxiliary frequency command When it is enabled auxiliary frequency command is forcibly switched to the value of b0 04 33 PID adjustment direction A0 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters The combination of this terminal and value of FO 04 PID positive and negative adjustment can determine the positive or negative characteristics of PID adjustment Table 6 10 PID adjustment direction E FO 04 Adjustment characteristic terminal 34 PID paused When this terminal is enabled PID adjustment is paused and the drive will maintain current output frequency After this terminal becomes disabled PID adjustment recovers 35 PID integration paused When this terminal is enabled PID integrator stops its integration and the current value is maintained After this terminal becomes disabled PID restores its integration 36 PID parameter switch When FO 14 PID parameter switch is set to 2 switched by terminal this terminal could be used to realize the switching between two groups of PID parameters When this terminal is enabled PID parameters are Kp1 and Tit Td1 which are determined by F0 08 FO0 10 When this terminal is disabled PID parameters are Kp2 Ti2 and Td2 which are determined by F0 11 F0 13 37 Count input The maximum frequency at count pulse input terminal is 200Hz and the count value can be memorized in case of power loss With the setting of F3 12 set count value and F3 13
28. ccccccccccseccceeeeceeeseseeseeeeseeeesaeesseseeseeeeseeesseeeaes 104 Group A1 User defined Displayed Parameters seeeeeeeeeereeel 107 Groupb Setting of Running Parameters eese 109 Group bO Frequency Command ssessssssssssssssssseeee eee nenne nennen 109 Group bt StarlStop COMMON uc ne eto Edda Rari d ie AEAEE NENTA Detox tru bda 122 Group b2 Accel Decel Parameters ccccccccecccecceueceeeeeeeeeeeeteeetseceseeeaeeeseeees 128 Group GC Iinpurand Ouiput Terfbifiele suiouiie ooo opa es tse ide dy er penna ve bv Eta EEEE EEAS 134 Group CO Digital INDUL us sececcetonusnneas lt ceandnacenaeuansaantesanadognotenmededvarsscce EAEAN EPRA NARE 134 GOP CT Digital OUMU TT ce 147 Group C2 Analog and Pulse Input esssseesesssssessseeeeenee ener 154 Group C3 Analog and Pulse OUIDUL I en pe he Ense Yea nv nui Ve quE n pue avus a quus 159 Group C4 Automatic Correction of Analog Input sessssssessse 163 Group d Motor and Control ParaMmeters ccccseeceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeneeeueteeeteeeeseeeeneeaaeees 165 Group dO Parameters of Motor 1 ccccceccceeecseeseeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeseeeeeteesseeetaeenes 165 Group d1 V f Control Parameters of Motor 1 ccccceccssceseeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeees 169 Group d2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1 ssseseeeeeeeeeeee 176 Group d3 Parameters of Motor 2
29. designated count value this terminal can control digital output set count value attained and designated count value attained 38 Count clear Used with count input terminal to clear pulse count value 39 Length count It is used for fixed length control and only takes effect on digital input terminal X6 DI The length is calculated via pulse input Please refer to specification of parameters F3 08 F3 11 for details When the length is attained digital output terminal length attained shall output effective signal The current length value will be memorized on power loss 40 Length clear Used with length count terminal to clear the length calculated 41 62 Reserved 63 Simple PLC paused When simple PLC is running and this terminal is enabled the current PLC status running 141 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual time and step will be memorized and the drive will run at OHz When this terminal is disabled the drive restores its running from the memorized moment 64 Simple PLC disabled When simple PLC is running and this terminal is enabled The status of PLC will be cleared and the output frequency is OHz When this terminal is disabled again the drive resumes PLC running from step 0 65 Simple PLC stop memory clear Under simple PLC running if this terminal is enabled in stop status the memorized information of PLC running step running time and running frequency will be all cleared Refer
30. sensor less vector control 1 amp 2 Speed ee 0 3 sensor less vector control 1 amp 2 fluctuation Torque response Siama teioue 0 5Hz 180 V f control sensor less vector control 1 eek 0 25Hz 180 sensor less vector control 2 10 Control characteristics 10ms sensor less vector control 1 amp 2 GK600 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information Start frequency 0 00 600 00Hz ius 0 00 60000s Decel time eae 0 7kHz 16kHz frequency Frequency Basic functions setting sources Motor started methods Motor stopped methods Dynamic braking capacity DC braking capacity Input terminals Basic functions Output terminals Digital setting keypad A V Digital setting terminal UP DOWN Communication Analog setting AI1 AI2 EAI Terminal pulse setting Started from starting frequency DC braking and then started Speed search started Ramp to stop Coast to stop Ramp stop DC brake Brake unit action voltage 650V 750V service time 0 0 100 0s brake units for GK600 4T45G 55L and below are built in or can be built in See table 2 1 DC braking start frequency 0 00 600 00Hz DC braking current 0 0 100 096 DC braking time 0 0 30 00s 6 digital inputs one of which can be used for high speed pulse input Compatible with active open collectors NPN PNP and dry contact input Digital inputs can be extended to 7 2 analog inputs one of which is voltage current programmab
31. sound heard it indicates clamping has been properly made L 5 A a T m Ra Tu TL Ys b l Sy Ake MS T 0 P4 SL Fig 3 3 Remove keypad Fig 3 4 Mount keypad 3 3 2 Open amp Mount Covers of GK600 4T2 2G 3 7LB GK600 4T15G 18 5LB gt gt Remove keypad Use the remove method as stated in Section 3 3 1 Open cover Method 1 loosen the captive cover screws as shown in Fig 3 5 a provided only for 11 15kW model hold the left and front sides of middle housing with left hand put the right thumb into the buckle and press tightly on cover with the other four fingers pull the lower part of the cover out to release as indicated by number 2 Method 2 loosen the captive cover screws as indicated by number 1 in Fig 3 5 b provided only for 11 15kW model use a sizeable slotted screwdriver to push the buckle slightly at the lower part of the cover to make buckle naturally off the groove as indicated by 2 pull the cover out to release as indicated by number 3 20 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring S SS qe qu VE GE SS 3 IL S pid A p a Metho
32. 01s Sets the output voltage change rate under V f separation pattern This parameter value is the time rising from OV to motor rated voltage or dropping from rated voltage to OV 175 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Group d2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1 Set control parameters in Group d2 when motor 1 is selected as current load motor on which sensor less vector control is performed ASR high speed Factory default d2 01 TA Add Range 0 0 20 0 ps proportional gain Kp1 2 0 ASR high speed Factory default d2 02 AES Range 0 000s 8 000s B integration time Ti1 0 200 ASR low speed Factory default d2 03 Neid Range 0 0 20 0 B proportional gain Kp2 2 0 ASR low d int ti Factory default To nu EET EEUU i time Ti2 0 200 uc Factory default d2 05 ASR switching frequency 1 Range 0 00Hz d2 06 5 00Hz TEE Range d2 05 upper limiting Factory default d2 06 ASR switching frequency 2 frequency 10 00Hz Under sensor less vector control SVC motor speed is kept at set value by automatic speed regulator ASR ASR parameters should be set in d2 01 d2 06 The proportional gain Kp and integration time Ti of ASR can be set through d2 01 d2 04 so as to change the speed response characteristic under SVC Increment of proportional gain Kp can bring in fast response of the system However bigger Kp value will bring about larger system oscillation Reduction of integration time Ti can also quicken resp
33. 0x0000 0xc0c1 0xc181 0x0140 0xc301 0x03c0 0x0280 0xc241 0xc601 0x06c0 0x0780 0xc741 0x0500 0xc5c1 0xc481 0x0440 0xcc01 0x0cc0 0x0d80 0xcd41 0x0f00 Oxcfc1 0xce81 0x0e40 0x0a00 0xcac1 0xcb81 0x0b40 0xc901 0x09c0 0x0880 0xc841 0xd801 0x18c0 0x1980 0xd941 0x1b00 0xdbc1 0xda81 0x1a40 0x1e00 0xdec1 0xdf81 0x1f40 0xdd01 0x1dc0 0x1c80 0xdc41 0x1400 0xd4c1 0xd581 0x1540 0xd701 0x17c0 0x1680 0xd641 0xd201 0x12c0 0x1380 0xd341 0x1100 0xd1c1 0xd081 0x1040 0xf001 0x30c0 0x3180 0xf141 0x3300 0xf3c1 0xf281 0x3240 0x3600 0xf6c1 0xf781 0x3740 0xf501 0x35c0 0x3480 0xf441 0x3c00 0xfcc1 0xfd81 0x3d40 0xff0 1 0x3fc0 0x3e80 Oxfe41 0xfAO1 0x3ac0 0x3b80 0xfb41 0x3900 0xf9c1 0xf881 0x3840 0x2800 0xe8c1 0xe981 0x2940 0xeb01 0x2bc0 0x2a80 0xea41 0xee01 0x2ec0 0x2f80 0xef41 0x2d00 Oxedc1 0xec81 0x2c40 0xe401 0x24c0 0x2580 0xe541 0x2700 0xe7c1 0xe681 0x2640 0x2200 0xe2c1 0xe381 0x2340 0xe101 0x21c0 0x2080 0xe041 0xa001 0x60c0 0x6180 0xa141 0x6300 0xa3c1 0xa281 0x6240 0x6600 0xa6c1 0xa781 0x6740 0xa501 0x65c0 0x6480 0xa441 0x6c00 0xacc1 0xad81 0x6d40 0xaf01 0x6fc0 0x66e80 0xae4 1 0xaAO1 0x6ac0 0x6b80 0xab41 0x6900 0xa9c1 0xa881 0x6840 0x7800 0xb8c1 0xb981 0x7940 Oxbb01 0x7bc0 0x7a80 0xba41 0xbe01 0x7ec0 0x7f80 0xbf41 0x7d00 0xbdc1 0xbc81 0x7c40 0xb401 0x74c0 0x7580 0xb541 0x7700 0xb7c1 0xb681 0x7640 0x7200 0xb2c1 0xb381 0x7340 0xb101 0x71c0 0x7080 0xb041 0x5000 0x90c1 0x9181 0x5140 0x9301 0x53c0 0x5280 0x9241 0x9601 0x56c0 0x5780 0x9741 0x5500 0x95c1 0x9481 0x5440 0x
34. 5LB Designation and function of terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC input terminals 1 2 B1 DC reactor connection terminals Connected with a jumper as factory default 2 B1 B Braking resistor connection terminals 2 B1 DC input terminals of externally mounted brake unit DC power supply input terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals gt Main circuit terminals of GK600 4T18 5G 22L B GK600 4T45G 55L B 29 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual Designation and function of terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC input terminals 1 2 B1 DC reactor connection terminals Connected with a jumper as factory default 2 B1 B2 Braking resistor connection terminals Q2 B1 DC input terminals of externally mounted brake unit DC power supply input terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals Drives GK600 4T18 5G 22L GK600 4T45G 55L have no built in brake units as factory default Make sure built in brake units exist before connecting braking resistors for these drives 3 6 2 Main Circuit Terminals of GK600 4T55G 75L GK600 4T90G 110L Designation and function of terminal R L1 S L2 T L3 Three phase AC input terminals Q1 2 DC reactor connection terminals Connected with a jumper as factory default DC input terminals of external mounted brake unit DC power supply input terminals U T1 V T2 W T3 Three phase AC output terminals
35. 6 16 Power rating of the drives Setting Range Default lt 15kW 0 7k 16k 18 5kW 45kW 0 7k 10k ne E 55kW 75kW 0 7k 8k Oo k 290kW 0 7k 3k 183 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual PWM carrier frequency setting method 1 When the motor line is too long reduce carrier frequency 2 When torque at low speed is unstable reduce carrier frequency 3 If the drive produces severe interference to surrounding equipment reduce carrier frequency 4 Leakage current of the drive is big reduce carrier frequency 5 Drive temperature rise is relatively high reduce carrier frequency 6 Motor temperature rise is relatively high increase carrier frequency 7 Motor noise is relatively big increase carrier frequency O Factory default E0 01 PWM optimization Range 0000 1121 100 Unit s place PWM carrier frequency adjusted with temperature 0 Automatic adjustment 1 No adjustment When automatic adjustment of PWM carrier frequency is selected the drive will automatically reduce carrier frequency with the temperature rise protecting itself against overtemperature Set to 1 where PWM carrier frequency change is not allowed Decade PWM modulation mode 0 five segment and seven segment automatic switchover 1 five segment mode 2 seven segment mode This selection is valid only for V f control When five segment mode is selected the drive has low temperature rise but relatively higher output curr
36. A1 06 A1 07 A1 08 A1 09 Unit s place control technique of motor 1 0 V f control 1 Sensor less vector control 1 Motor control technique 2 Sensor less vector control 2 Decade control technique of motor 2 0 V f control 1 Sensor less vector control 1 2 Sensor less vector control 2 Group A1 User defined Displayed Parameters pe 4 range of thousands place 1 0 A b C d E F H L U User defined displayed parameter Setting range of hundreds place 0 9 pouom range of decade 0 9 User defined displayed parameter Setting range of unit s place 0 9 3 User defined display parameter 4 5 6 User defined displayed parameter 8 9 10 65 D Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory P t D default A1 10 ore displayed parameter A0 00 m MM User defined displayed parameter A0 00 12 A4 12 oe displayed parameter A0 00 m A1 13 User defined displayed parameter A0 00 14 X42 Re ce displayed parameter A0 00 ae A1 15 E displayed parameter A0 00 EI A1 16 E displayed parameter A0 00 M M47 E displayed parameter A0 00 E A1 18 pore displayed parameter A0 00 A1 19 User defined displayed parameter A0 00 20 A1 20 P AAMEIEI group display hide 0 FFFF FFFF characteristic 1 M21 aid group display hide 0 FFFF FFFF characteristic 2 Groupb Setting of Running Parameters Group bO Frequency Command 0 Master frequency command 1 Master amp auxiliary computation result 2 Switch between master and au
37. ASI E ron EE e cae aic oninia 219 Group UT Fault RECOM osos atn cpi asa gec bias cena api cua tie oH Ee F E orit 222 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ssssssssesssseneenn mener 225 7 1 Fault Causes and Troubleshooting ccccssccecseeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeseecseesessneseessaaes 225 Chapter 8 Maintenance sssssssssssseseseeneeen nennen nnne nnns anna nnne nnns 233 9 1 retia Minceur o m UT 233 8 2 Regular Maintenance sea ecucttirhuibtast bite set beta due ed canatesualid pam o vta as UneC toU Rd Sanubzs 234 8 3 Replacement of Vulnerable Parts ccccccseeeceeeeceeeeeseecseeenseeceeeesseeeenseesseeesees 235 Es Molto 2 2 BN NER RNC 236 Appendix Communication Protocol ssseesssssssseenere 238 1 Networking TOS ooi dott qeod va ER RD MED Cen cade eO ehm Gd anb EC eo ad S ROO 238 Mg 238 CN C MMUNICAUON MOCE T 238 zw Procol FONTA e nnm 239 S PTOIOGEOL EBD sceau d Ru bieten DES renee a een eee eee dE 241 6 Operator ciqbeie DHT TET 253 T LRG CRC Generation oiccscsceteceievervccveacceedivccussedevtavedvededsesvedsadbeneesstvenesetineeseedverdedeuss 257 GK600 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Precautions Chapter 1 Safety Precautions Safety Precautions Safety signs in this manual WARNING indicates the situation in which the failure to follow operating requirements may result in fire or serious pers
38. Appendix Table 13 Line diagnosis sub parameter Data Data Sub PARA Meaning of subfunction request response Reinitialize communication make 0000 0000 no response mode disable 0001 FFOO FFOO Reinitialize EODD AMON make no response mode disable Set the frame end of ASCII mode and this new frame end will replace the original New frame New frame 0003 line feed symbol Note new frame end end 00 end 00 shall not be greater than Ox7F and shall not be equal to 0x3A Set no response mode Only response to reinitialization communication request This 0004 0000 No response 4 is mainly used for isolating faulty equipment Make slave no response to invalid 0000 0000 P 0030 command and error command Make slave response to invalid command 0001 0001 P and error command Parameter 0x10 write parameters continuously Request format is shown in appendix table 14 Appendix Table 14 Application layer protocol Data length number of pe data unit bytes Register address 0x0000 OxFFFF Number of registers 0x1 0x4 1 Number of bytes of register 2 number of operation content registers 2 number of operation Register content registers Response format is shown in appendix table 15 245 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Appendix Table 15 Application layer protocol Data length number of ange data unit bytes Parameter Owx immo Parameter 0x42 parameter
39. Command frequency Fig 6 9 Once parameters of skip zones are set the output frequency of the drive would automatically get out of these skip zones even if the command frequency is within these zones ATTENTION Output frequency of drive can normally pass through skip zones during Accel and Decel Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default b0 19 Jog frequency COSTOS 5 00tz This parameter sets the running frequency during jog Jog Accel time is set by parameter b2 10 121 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual while its Decel time by parameter b2 11 Jog run command control could be performed through keypad control terminals or communication input Multifunction MF key can be set as forward jog or reverse jog key through parameter LO 00 Jog can be realized using forward jog terminal and reverse jog terminal of DI Jog can be realized via communication input See drive communication protocol for further information See Jog diagrammatic sketch 6 10 Running frequency f1 Time t1 t2 Fig 6 10 Thereof f1 is jog frequency b0 19 t1 represents the ACC time from zero to jog frequency t1 b2 10 x f1 b0 08 b0 08 is the maximum frequency t2 is the DEC time from jog frequency to 0 t2 b2 11 x f1 b0 08 ATTENTION gt Set value of jog frequency is free from limitations of upper and lower limit frequency gt Jog is started from starting frequency and its start is not sub
40. Group L_ Keys and Display of Keypad Group LO Keys of Keypad 0 No function LO 00 MF key setting 1 Forward jog 2 Reverse jog 95 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory 3 Forward reverse switchover 4 Emergency stop 1 set Decel time on b2 09 5 Emergency stop 2 coast to stop 6 Run command sources shifted 0 Not locked 1 Full locked 2 Keys locked other than RUN LO 01 Keys locked option STOP RESET 0 STOP key valid only when under keypad control vede TREBCHONOUSTO KON 1 STOP key valid under any run command source Unit s place option on stop 0 Clear on stop 1 Holding on stop Frequency adjustment through 2er aE PMOI OM POWE OSS L0 03 0 Clear on power loss keys A V 1 Holding on power loss Hundreds place integrating option 0 Integrating disabled 1 Integrating enabled ioujg POP size or irequeney agjustment 5 eo org DH S 0 03 Hz s through keys A V Group L1 LED Display Setting Setting of binary system 0 Display disabled 1 Display enabled Unit s place BITO Running frequency Hz BIT1 Command frequency Hz L1 00 LED displayed parameters setting 1BIT2 Bus voltage V on running status BIT3 Output current A Decade BITO Output torque 96 BIT1 Output power kW BIT2 Output voltage V BIT3 Motor speed r min Hundreds place 96 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory Attr Parameter Designation Scope default BITO Al1 V BIT1 A
41. Group bO Output voltage is set by d1 18 See d1 18 for details This mode applies to variable frequency power supply or torque motor control etc 8 V f separated pattern 2 Determine a certain voltage by linear V f mode and then multiply this voltage by the proportion set by d1 18 to obtain drive output voltage See d1 18 for details Range 0 00Hz rated frequency Factory default d1 01 V f frequency value f3 of motor 50 00Hz Factory default d1 02 V f voltage value V3 Range 0 096 100 096 100 0 o d1 03 V f frequency value f2 Range d1 05 d1 01 daas e iste di 0 00Hz Factory default d1 04 V f voltage value V2 Range 0 0 100 0 HRS o 170 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters d1 05 V f frequency value f1 Range d1 07 d1 03 Pecten etx ds B 0 00Hz Factory default d1 06 V f voltage value V1 Range 0 0 100 0 O89 o Factory default d1 07 V f frequency value fO Range 0 00Hz d1 05 0 00Hz Factory default d1 08 V f voltage value VO Range 0 096 100 096 0 0 T o d1 01 d1 08 is used for broken line V f mode Voltage value 100 corresponds to rated voltage of motor Please rationally set the values of frequency and voltage at knees on the basis of characteristics of motor and load Improper setting may rise output current even burn the motor Factory default d1 09 Torque boost Range 0 0 30 0 0 0 o Under V f pattern output voltage at low frequency can be compensated by this para
42. Mapping register Parameter group i group address high byte address high byte pa 09 M For example the register address of drive parameter b0 02 is 0x202 while that of EO 07 is 0x1107 In the following paragraphs we present the formats and meanings of Modbus protocol parameters and data portion hereafter i e to introduce the parameter and data related contents in above noted data frame format These two parts constitute the application layer protocol data unit of Modbus The application layer protocol data unit mentioned below refers to these two parts We take RTU mode for example to describe frame format below The length of application layer protocol data unit should be doubled in ACSII mode Application layer protocol data units of various parameters are as follows Parameter 03 read register content Request format is shown in appendix table 6 Appendix Table 6 Application layer protocol Data length number of Range data unit bytes Response format is shown in appendix table 7 242 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol Appendix Table 7 Application layer protocol Data length number of Range data unit bytes Parameter ft 1 Number of read bytes 1 2 number of registers Register content 2 number of registers D Parameter 06 0x41 write register content 0x41 saved at power loss Request format is shown in appendix table 8 Appendix Table 8 Application layer protoc
43. Please use differential control with caution Factory default FO 11 Proportional gain Kp2 Range 0 0 100 0 20 TERES Factory default F0 12 Integration time Ti2 Range 0 0s 100 0s Ace oe Factory default F0 13 Differential time Td2 Range 0 0s 100 0s NIE Process PID is provided with two groups of proportion integral and differential parameters set by F0 14 F0 11 F0 13 are the second group of parameters F0 14 PID parameter switchover Range 0 2 Factory default 0 Process PID is provided with two groups of proportional integral and differential parameters which is set by this parameter 0 No switch determined by parameters Kp1 Ti1 and Td1 Always determined by Kp1 Ti1 and Td1 set at F0 08 FO0 10 Auto switched on the basis of input offset When the offset between setting and feedback is less than the set value of F0 15 PID adjustment is determined by Kp1 Ti and Td1 When the offset between setting and feedback is bigger than the set value of F0 15 PID adjustment is determined by Kp2 Ti2 and Td2 set at FO 11 F0 13 2 Switched by terminal When digital input terminal PID parameters switch is OFF it is determined by Kp1 Ti1 and Td1 When PID parameters switch is ON it is determined by Kp2 Ti2 and Td2 Input offset under Factory default Range 0 0 100 0 PID auto switch i i 20 0 When FO 14 is set to 1 this parameter sets the switching point of the two groups of PID parameters When the of
44. Refer to CO 01 CO0 10 for further information 2 Set terminal UP DOWN frequency change step size C0 18 3 Set C0 17 terminal UP DOWN frequency adjustment treatment ATTENTION Frequency adjustment via terminal UP and DOWN can be cleared through terminal UP DOWN including V key adjustment clear Refer to C0 01 CO0 10 for details 2 Analog input Al1 O 10V voltage input and O 20mA current input are optional for Al1 which can be selected using toggle switch S2 on control board S1 S2 S3 485 AM AO1 ON I OFF V V Fig 6 2 Refer to specification of C2 00 C2 20 for corresponding relation between analog input and output frequency See parameter Group C4 for automatic correction of analog quantity input 3 Analog input AI2 Al2 input is the 10V 10V voltage input and the plus minus of voltage determines the setting direction of frequency Refer to detailed description of C2 00 C2 20 for corresponding relation between analog quantity and frequency See function codes of Group C4 for automatic correction of analog input 4 Analog input EAI on IO expansion board Terminal EAI is located at IO expansion board supporting 0 10V voltage input and 0 20mA 112 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters current input It can be used with the same way as Al1 When using external voltage current analog input to the drive the connection diagram is shown as Fig 6 3
45. Upon the receipt of run command the drive will accelerate to the contracting brake release frequency set by E0 06 2 When frequency attains the value as set by E0 06 digital output terminal contracting brake control outputs OFF to control the contracting brake release 3 Perform constant speed running at contracting brake release frequency During this period the drive keeps the output current no higher than the current as set by E0 07 4 When the running time at contracting brake release frequency attains set value of E0 08 the drive will accelerate to set frequency 5 Upon the receipt of stop command the drive decelerate to contracting brake actuation frequency set by E0 09 and maintains constant speed running at this frequency 6 When the running frequency attains the set value of E0 09 waiting a period of time set by E0 10 then digital output terminal contracting brake control will output ON signal to control contracting brake actuation 7 When the time of output ON signal contracting brake control attains the set value of EO 11 the drive will block the output and stop Contracting brake release Factory default F0 06 Range 0 00Hz 10 00Hz A frequency 2 50HZ When frequency attains this value digital output terminal contracting brake control outputs OFF signal to control the release of contracting brake This value can be set the same value as rated slip frequency of motor Under V f control it could be set to a re
46. above Fig 2 3 Parts drawing Chapter 2 Product Information GK600 User Manual 2 6 Appearance Mounting Dimensions and Weight o 4 i wm E MM a i o D m a GK600 4T15G 18 5LB and below fx i i yt O j U b GK600 4T18 5G 22L GK600 4T90G 110L GK600 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information L 1 i S i i Q It TI UI Ei II Izd iil l ll A M
47. adopted reducing EMI interference to the signal wires as much as possible Coder must be provided with shielded cables whose shielded layer must be properly grounded 233 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 7 1 Control Board Diagram Keypad 485 interface Expansion board interface Main signal interface o a o Lu Dn o o a a D o o mi Lr Oo Oo Oo n n Oo n n mi mi u Oo ao 1 Terminal resistor option for terminal communication S2 Analog input 1 voltage current option S3 Analog output 1 voltage current option EE s1 s2 S3 V 485 Al1 AO1 ON l l OFF V V EDN FIN AEE ZF m F ATNI T we Ar J J 1 DIE i I J A AUTA NL E NPA ALT ON J A RY STN UN TN PPS ST N D c 3l 1 Di C a LA Ty A Ey RIAA ay CU T Muy E M User signal terminal Fig 3 12 Control board diagram 34 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 7 2 Wiring Diagram
48. be but the response will be slower This parameter is applicable to loads such as fan and pump or light load for a long time Where rapid change is required this parameter is suggested to be default set 0 0 V f oscillation Suppression Factory default d1 16 ne Range 0 3000 5 gain 1 16 V f oscillation suppression Factory default d1 17 eee Range 0 3000 5 gain 2 20 Under V f control speed and current oscillation is likely to occur due to load vibration and may lead to system failure even over current protection This is particularly obvious during no load or light load applications The appropriate setting of parameter values of d1 16 and d1 17 would effectively suppress speed and current oscillation In many case it is not necessary to modify the default setting Please make progressive change around default setting since excessive setting will influence V f control performance 174 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Voltage setting on V f d1 18 Range 0 5 Factory default 0 separated pattern This parameter takes effect when d1 00 is set to 7 or 8 0 digital setting by d1 19 Under V f separated pattern 1 drive output voltage is completely determined by d1 19 10096 corresponds to motor rated voltage Under V f separated pattern 2 output voltage voltage calculated according to linear V f curve x 2 x d1 19 Set by AI1 2 Set by AI2 3 Set by EAI Under V f separated pattern 1 drive outp
49. command EN HER N BIT4 w Coast to stop disabled ATTENTION When BITO and BIT2 coexist jog takes precedence Drive status bits are shown in appendix table 25 Appendix Table 25 Status word 1 bits 00 Rem BITO 8 Reversed dP BIT 1 s Fem iP we Ped Main setting not 3 Memseingatenei OO O O S O O OO NENNEN ce 0 drive normal Non 0 drive at fault Refer to BIT15 BIT8 00 OxFF Fault code relative specification of the meanings of the fault codes in this user manual 252 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol Appendix Table 26 Status word 2 bits 0 Me 0 NePDnmWg 0 Meum Nu ae Running at multi step Running at non multi step Non wobble frequency Undervoltage Normal voltage Sensor less vector control Non sensor less vector control identification 6 Operation Instructions 03H reads multiple including one registers default address is 05 Master enquiry 253 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Appendix Table 27 Address Parameter Register Number of Check code address registers Slave response Appendix Table 28 Address Parameter Total number of Data Check code bytes 05 03 2 number of Bn BO XX XX registers Register address 0000 6322 Number of registers 00 01 00 04 Data n is equal to 2 x the number of registers 1 Application example Note before using communication c
50. contact action 8 4 Storage Storage environment should meet the requirements as set forth in the table below Recommended storage method and Items Requirements environment In case of long term storage areas with an ambient temperature of less than 30 C are Storage recommended 9 40 70 C temperature Avoid the storage in areas where temperature shock may result in condensation and freezing Storage 5 959 Product could be sealed with plastic film and humidity dessicant A space with low vibration and low content of salt where there Storage is no direct exposure to Product could be sealed with plastic film and environment sunlight dust no corrosive or dessicant flammable gas oil stain vapor and water drop 236 GK600 User Manual Chapter 8 Maintenance ATTENTION Since long term storage may lead to the deterioration of electrolytic capacitor the inverter must be powered on once in case storage period exceeds 2 years During the power on input voltage must be boosted to rated value gradually using a voltage regulator and be sure to have the inverter operate at no load for more than 5 hours 237 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol 1 Networking Mode The drives have two networking modes single master multiple slaves networking and single master single slave networking
51. display of parameters Factory P D arameter esignation Scope dec Attr Group A System Parameter and Parameter Management Group AO System Parameter A0 00 _ Setting of user password 0 FFFF 0000 A 0 Display all parameters 1 Only display parameters AO 00 and AO0 01 2 Only display AO 00 AO 01 and A0 01 Display of parameters user defined parameters A1 00 A1 19 3 Only display AO 00 A0 01 and the parameters different with factory default 0 All parameter programming allowed A0 02 P t tecti eH 1 Only A0 00 and this parameter i programming allowed 0 No operation 1 Clear fault record 2 Restore all parameters to factory default excluding motor Parameter initialization parameters x 3 Restore all parameters to factory default including motor parameters 4 Restore all parameters to backup parameters N i A0 04 Parameter backup PO O ODeIQUon x 1 Backup all parameters 0 No operation AO f t 10 05 Copy vB Senis 1 Parameter upload poo fe 64 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory 2 Parameter download excluding motor parameters 3 Parameter download including motor parameters 0 Type G applicable to constant torque load pre vee DEYE 1 Type L applicable to light duty load 0 AC input A0 07 P ly t f th D odd 1 DC input poo fx 0 Motor 1 lecti f Selection of motor 1 motor 2 Eor EU A0 08 A1 00 A1 01 A1 02 A1 03 A1 04 A1 05
52. input of inflection point Aof Range 100 0 100 0 Factory default 0 0 curve 3 Range minimum input of Input of inflection point B of l C2 17 e a curve 3 input of inflection Factory default 0 0 point A of curve 3 Set value corresponding to C2 18 input of inflection point B of Range 100 0 100 0 Factory default 0 0 curve 3 WR i Range 110 0 input of C2 19 Minimum input of curve 3 l Factory default 0 096 inflection point B of curve 3 Set value corresponding to c2 20 ve ue corresponding tO Range 100 0 100 0 Factory default 0 0 minimum input of curve 3 Curve 3 is defined by C2 13 C2 20 The usage of curve 3 is the same as that of curve 2 C2 21 Al terminal filtering time Range 0 000s 10 000s Factory default 0 01s C2 22 AI2 terminal filtering time Range 0 000s 10 000s Factory default 0 01s C2 23 EAI terminal filtering time Range 0 000s 10 000s Factory default 0 01s C2 21 C2 23 define the filtering time of analog input terminals Al1 AI2 and EAI Long filtering time results in strong immunity from interference but slow response while short filtering time brings rapid response but weak immunity from interference Factory default C2 24 DI maximum input Range C2 26 50 0kHz 50 0kHz Set value corresponding to Factory default C2 25 3 ponemg 9 Range 100 0 100 0 DI maximum input 100 0 ae Factory default C2 26 DI minimum input Range 0 0kKHz C2 24 0 0kHz Set value corre
53. its leakage current shall be less than holding current of controlled contactor or relay piezoresistor or fly wheel diode etc shall be mounted be sure to pay close attention to polarity in case of DC electromagnetic circuit Absorbing devices should be mounted close to the ends of relay or contactor 42 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 10 Instruction of Signal Switches S1 S2 S3 485 AM AO1 ON OFF V V Fig 3 23 Jumper diagram of signal switching Default setting Designation Function No termination resistor I current input 0 20mA V voltage input O 10V 0 10V I current output 0 20mA V voltage output 0 10V 0 10V 3 11 EMI Solutions Selection of 485 termination resistor ON 1000 termination nee resistor provided OFF no termination resistor Due to its working principle the drive will inevitably produce certain noise that may influence and disturb other equipment Moreover since the internal weak electric signal of drive is also susceptible to the interference of drive itself and other equipment EMI problems shall be inevitable In order to reduce or avoid the interference of drive to external environment and protect drive against interference from external environment this section makes a brief description of noise abatement ground handling leakage current suppression and the application of power line filters 3 11 1 Noise Abat
54. maintains the present output frequency and no longer responds to the change of command frequency But it will still perform ramp down stop when receiving stop command This terminal is disabled during normal ramp down stop 22 External fault input This terminal is used to input the fault signal of external equipment making the drive to perform fault monitoring and protection When external fault signal is received the drive shall display PEr and stop running 23 Fault reset RESET When the drive fault occurs this enabled terminal will reset the fault This function is the same with RESET key on keypad 24 Pulse input valid only for X6 DI This is valid only for digital input terminal X6 DI This terminal receives pulse signal as frequency command Refer to C2 24 C2 27 for the relationship between pulse signal and command frequency When pulse input is selected as the frequency command X6 DI terminal must be set to pulse input C0 06 is set to 24 25 Motor 1 2 switchover The loaded motor can be selected via this terminal as shown in Table 6 9 139 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Table 6 9 Motor 1 2 switchover AO 08 Loaded motor terminal e 0o Wei Set parameters of motor 1 in parameter groups d0 d2 and set parameters of motor 2 in groups d3 d5 26 Reserved 27 Run command switched to keypad control This terminal should be enabled by trigger edge When this terminal status is
55. motor 1 Group d1 V f Control Parameters of Motor 1 Linear V f Multi stage V f d1 01 d1 08 1 2nd power 1 4th power V f curve setting 1 6th power x 1 8th power 2 0nd power V f separated mode 1 V f separated mode 2 d1 01 d1 02 Vifvoltage value V 10 0 100 0 100 096 d1 03 Viffrequency valuef2 d1 05 d1 01 0 00H d1 04 V fvollage value V2 0 096 100 096 0 096 di 05 _ V f frequency value d1 07 d1 03 EN d1 06 V fvoltage value V1 0 096 100 096 0 x d1 07 V f frequency value fO 0 00Hz d1 05 d1 08 V f voltage value VO 0 0 100 0 x d1 09 Torque boost 0 0 30 0 79 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory d1 10 A Slip compensation gain 0 0 400 0 100 0 d1 11 Droop control 0 00Hz mximum frequency 0 00Hz d1 12 Current limitation mode n x d1 13 Digital setting of current limit value 20 0 200 0 160 0 d1 14 CUERE coeff on flux 0 001 1 000 0 500 weakening 1 d1 15 Energy saving percentage 40 0 d1 16 V f oscillation suppression gain 1 0 3000 1 2 6 di 17 V foscillation suppression gain 2 0 3000 0 x 0 d1 19 digital setting 1 Set by Al1 d1 18 Voltage setting on V f separated 2 Set by Al2 pattern Voltage variation time on V f d1 20 separated pattern 0 00s 600 00s Group d2 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 1 d2 00 Reserved Reserved d2 01 ASR high speed proportional gain 0 0 20 0 Kp1 d2 02 an high speed integr
56. protection point thermal protection point 229 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK600 User Manual Fault Fault er Fault description Causes Solutions code Display Detection circuit Seek services damaged Module Module detection circuit Seek services temperature damaged detection l mdisconmacfen Thermistor damaged Seek services Ambient temperature is Raise ambient too low temperature Expansion board E uk Expansion abnormal board i omen oose or poor expansion Bill outandvedesd board connection abnormal Control board abnormal Loose or poor drive line Pull out and re insert connection after overall power down Control board abnormal Seek services Drive line connection abnormal External fault terminal is Check the status of External enabled external fault terminal equipment error Stall condition lasts too Check if the load is long abnormal Consecutive running time attained Consecutive running See specification of time attained enabled Group EO Cumulative running time attained Cumulative running time See specification of attained enabled Group EO Power supply abnormal at running Parameter read write EEPROM abnormal on control Seek services read write fault board Fluctuation of grid Check input power grid voltage is out of range voltage Function conflict Analog input terminals Do not set analog inputs 23 TEr of analog are set to the same i i to the same function terminals func
57. speed without load is the rated slip Through real time detection of motor load slip compensation automatically adjusts the drive output frequency on the basis of rated slip and motor load reducing the impact of changing load on motor speed Gain adjustment method please make the adjustment around 100 When motor is driving an electric driven load if motor speed is relatively lower the gain should be appropriately increased if motor speed is relatively higher reduce the gain appropriately When motor is driving a power generating load if motor speed is relatively lower the gain should be decreased if motor speed is relatively higher increase the gain appropriately Diagram of slip compensation gain is shown as Fig 6 44 and 6 45 Motor speed 2 Slip compensation gain d1 10 100 n1 _ Slip compensation gain d1 10 50 NESS SSeS ces _ Slip compensation gain d1 10 0 haa Se curreret n1 rated speed of motor n2 rated motor speed rated slip 2 n3 rated motor speed rated slip Motor load 0 Rated load Fig 6 44 Diagram of slip compensation on electric driven load 172 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Slip compensation gain d1 10 0 Motor speed ARMES UE Decio t ccc n3 n3 rated motor speed rated slip n2 rated motor speed rated slip 2 n1 rated motor speed Slip Slip compensation compensation gain d1 10 gain d1 10 5096 10096
58. terminal filtering time 0 000s 10 000s 0 01s C2 22 AI2terminal filtering time 0 000s 10 000s 0 01s Goog me enng Ume 0 000s 10 000s 0 01s on IO expansion board x C2 17 nput of inflection point B of curve 3 C2 19 Minimum input of curve 3 C2 24 DI maximum input Range C2 26 50 0kHz 50 0kHz Set val ding to DI maximum input C2 26 DI minimum input Range 0 0kHz C2 24 0 0kH Set value corresponding to DI x x x N x C2 27 Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 minimum input C2 28 DI filtering time 0 000s 1 000s 0 001s Group C3 Analog and Pulse Output C3 00 No output on IO expansion board Output frequency Output current Output torque Output voltage Output power Bus voltage Reserved Torque current 10 Magnetic flux current C221 ES C224 ES C228 Y2 DO output function when used as DO 76 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P D A arameter esignation Scope default 16 Communication input percentage 17 Output frequency before compensation 18 99 Reserved C303 AOt offset 100 0 100 0 C305 AOtfilteringtime f 0s 10 008_ 4 C308 EAOfilteringtime 0 0s 10 05s_ 4 cag pio MAXIMUM caput pulse 0 1kHz 50 0kHz 50 0kHz P frequency 0 No center point 1 Center point is C3 09 2 and the corresponding parameter value is positive when frequency is higher than C3 10 DO output center point center point 2 Center poin
59. terminal outputs ON Accumulative running time is maintained when stop 2f Contracting brake control Refer to the specification of parameters EO 05 E0 11 for details 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 PLC step completed Upon the completion of current step of simple PLC running ON signal with the width of 500ms will be output 31 PLC cycle completed Upon the completion of a cycle of simple PLC running ON signal with a width of 500ms will be output 32 Wobble frequency attains to upper or lower limit frequency When drive output frequency attains upper limit frequency b0 09 or lower limit frequency b0 10 under wobble frequency running ON signal will be output 33 99 Reserved C1 04 Y1 output delay time Range 0 0s 3600 0s Factory default 0 0s C1 05 Y2 output delay time Range 0 0s 3600 0s Factory default 0 0s Control board relay C1 06 Range 0 0s 3600 0s Factory default 0 0s output delay time Expansion board relay C1 07 Range 0 0s 3600 0s Factory default 0 0s output delay time These four parameters define the delay response time of digital output terminals Y1 amp Y2 control board relay and expansion board relay ATTENTION When Y2 DO terminal is used as high speed pulse output set by C3 02 delay time set by C1 05 is disabled Enabled state of digital Factory default C1 08 Soo Range 0000 1114 Wu output 0000 Unit s place Y1 0 Positive logic ON when current passes through 1 Negative logic ON when n
60. the rated voltage of motor 119 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Output voltage A VN Output frequency ATTENTION gt Maximum frequency upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency should be set with care in accordance with nameplate parameters of motor and operation requirements gt Jog and motor parameter identification is free from limitations of upper and lower limit frequency gt In addition to limitation of upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency the output frequency is also subject to limitations of starting frequency stop DC brake initial frequency skip frequency and other parameter settings gt The rank relation between maximum frequency upper limit frequency and lower limit frequency is shown as Fig 6 8 Upper and lower limit frequencies restrict actual output frequency to motor If command frequency is higher than upper limit frequency the running would be at upper limit frequency In case command frequency is lower than lower limit frequency the running should be in accordance with the setting of bO 11 Operation when command frequenc b0 11 5 Mb E sj Range 0 2 Factory default 0 lower than lower limit frequency 0 Run at lower limit frequency In case command frequency is lower than lower limit frequency the running should be at lower limit frequency 1 Run at OHz In case the frequency command is lower than lower limit frequency the running shou
61. time from initial status 10Hz to 40Hz 6s x 40Hz 10Hz 50Hz 3 6s Assuming b2 15 0 20s and b2 16 0 40s the actual Accel time under S curve Accel Decel A 3 6s 0 20s 0 40s 2 3 9s ATTENTION Provided the above noted calculated linear Accel time is less than Time of initial segment of Accel S curve Time of last segment of Accel S curve 2 there will not be linear part Decel is the same as above 3 S curve Accel Decel B Schematic diagram is shown as Fig 6 15 131 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Output frequency Time Fig 6 15 S curve time at initial segment of Accel is b2 19xt1 in the figure in which the Accel rate increases progressively In this period the S curve time at ending segment is b2 20xt1 and the Accel rate decreases gradually At the middle of t1 it is linear Accel with a constant rate which is adjusted automatically based on the setting of b2 19 and b2 20 Decel period t2 is similar as above Make sure the sum of proportions of initial and ending segments is no more than 100 i e the sum of set values of b2 19 and b2 20 should not exceed 100 0 while that of b2 21 and b2 22 should not exceed 100 Example Assuming that the maximum frequency b0 08 is 50Hz and the Accel time setting is 6s the linear Accel time required for Accel from initial status 10Hz to 40Hz 6s x 40Hz 10Hz 50Hz 3 6s Assuming that b2 19 20 0 and b2 20 30 0 Initial seg
62. to parameter Group F2 for more information 66 Start wobble frequency This terminal takes effect only when F3 00 is set to 1 wobble frequency function enabled and F3 01 unit s place is set to started through terminal When this terminal is disabled the drive runs at preset wobble frequency set by F3 02 When this terminal is enabled the drive would activate wobble frequency running immediately Refer to Group F3 for details of wobble frequency 67 Clear wobble frequency status When the drive is running at wobble frequency if this terminal is enabled the memorized wobble frequency status will be cleared no matter which wobble frequency start method automatic via terminal is taken When this terminal is disabled wobble frequency would resume Refer to Group F3 for information of wobble frequency 68 Running prohibited When this terminal is enabled the drive will coast to stop if it s running and will prohibit start running if it s in a standby state This terminal mainly applies to the situation where safety interlocking is required Only after this terminal becomes disabled the drive can be restarted 69 DC brake in running When this terminal is enabled the drive will immediately fall into DC brake After the terminal becomes disabled the drive will be restored to normal state and ramp up to the command frequency with the set ramp up time ATTENTION When this terminal is enabled output frequency does not need to dece
63. voltage abnormal PIROT AD PM POWSE gig Undervoltage voltage protection TTE Switching power supply edu abnormal PID feedback channel Check the feedback PID detection abnormal channel out of limit Inappropriate setting of Set properly PID parameters When a fault occurs please identify the causes and seek solutions according the guidance Al input 40 AIP ni l ae m out of limit Al input is too high or low hile ie canis correct range ef ATTENTION in the table If the fault fails to be solved do not apply power to the drive again Contact the supplier for service in time 232 GK600 User Manual Chapter 8 Maintenance Chapter 8 Maintenance Ambient temperature humidity salt mist dust vibration aging and wear of internal components may result in drive faults Routine maintenance shall be performed during the use and storage ATTENTION Please make sure the power supply of the drive has been cut off and DC bus voltage has discharged to OV before the maintenance 8 1 Routine Inspection Please use the drive in the environment recommended by this manual and perform routine inspection in accordance with the table below Inspection Inspection Inspection aspects Criteria items methods m Lo condensation not Humidity Hygrometer mM Dust oil stains Operating moisture and environment water drop i i Smooth running No abnormal Vibration Observation f vibration G Smell visual No peculiar smel
64. when users need to check set frequency as well as the values of bus voltage and Al1 valis in stop status make L1 02 0013 refer to key to display the value of bus voltage and setting method f parameters and press the then press again to display the value of AI1 Fig 4 2 Stop parameter display status Displaying setting frequency 50 00Hz Running status would be enabled immediately upon the receipt of run command in stop status Press VENE to get into parameter edit status get into password authentification status if parameter under password protection Directly get into frequency modification status when receive UP DOWN command from terminal or A B and WS pressing on Keypad Switch to fault display status once a fault occurs or an alarm is given 4 1 3 2 Running Parameters Display Status In case there is no fault drive will get into running parameters display status upon the receipt of run command Default display is running frequency and other parameters can be displayed through setting of L1 00 and L1 01 and press 9 to shift Example in running status when need to check bus voltage motor speed and input terminals status we need to set L 1 007 0084 and L1 01 0004 and press to shift to the display of bus voltage then press again to display motor speed and then press 9 to display input terminals state value 49 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual Fig 4 3 Running parame
65. write the value of C4 05 directly into C4 06 or write the value of C4 07 directly into C4 08 Group d Motor and Control Parameters Group d0 Parameters of Motor 1 When motor 1 is selected as current load motor please set motor parameters in Group dO d0 00 Type of motor 1 Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Ordinary motor 1 Variable frequency motor The major difference between ordinary motor and variable frequency motor lies in the handling of motor overload protection Under low speed running ordinary motor has poor heat dissipation so motor overload protection shall be derated at low speed Since fan based heat dissipation of variable frequency motor is not affected by motor speed low speed overload protection is not necessarily derated Therefore please set d0 00 to 0 when driving ordinary asynchronous motor so as to protect the motor reliably Range Fact default dO 01 Power rating of motor 1 iai kin 0 4kW 6553 5kW model defined dO 02 Rated voltage of motor 1 Range 0V 480V Factory default 380V Factory default dO 03 Rated current of motor 1 Range 0 0A 6553 5A AE Mida model defined Range Factory default d0 04 Rated frequency of motor 1 J XE 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 50 00Hz d0 05 Number of poles of motor 1 Range 1 80 Factory default 4 Factory default d0 06 Rated speed of motor 1 Range 0 65535 r min model defined Above noted motor parameters must be correctly set according to motor nameplate Please se
66. 0 19 Status of digital outputterminal 0 7 0 o U020 PiDsett 0 0 100 0 U023 PlCsep 0 15 o Jol U0 25 V fseparated actual output voltage 0 0 100 0 U0 30 Cumulative power up time U0 31 Cumulative running time 0 No fault source FAL fault source 99 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory 4 OC fault 5 OU fault 6 Other sources U0 35 Terminal countvale 0 655355 o U036 mRuncommandrecordatLoU 0 1 0 o U0 37 FaultcoderecordatloU o 0 0 U0 38 UO 39 Current detection fault source UO 40 Higher place numbers of actual 0 65 length Q Q UO 44 Lower place numbers of actual 0 685535 6 length Higher place numbers of keypad ish AIV stored value pe Lower place numbers of keypad U0 43 0 00 655 35 Hz 0 00Hz AIV stored value Higher place numbers of terminal Lower place numbers of terminal 4 00 Pd UP DOWN stored value PAARS R pene U0 46 U0 47 U0 48 U0 49 U0 50 U0 51 U0 52 Group U1 Fault Record No fault Accel overcurrent Constant speed overcurrent Decel overcurrent Accel overvoltage Constant speed overvoltage Decel overvoltage Module protection Parameter identification failed Drive overloaded A loa al Code of the latest fault 100 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P D A arameter esignation Scope default 10 Motor overloaded 11 Current detection ab
67. 0 User Manual Factory defaut d5 03 on low speed proportional gain 0 0 20 0 d5 04 ASR low speed integration time Ti2 0 000s 8 000s 0 200 NO d 05 _ ASR switching frequency 1__ 0 00Hz d5 06 5 05 upper limiting frequency oms 500 0ms oms 500 0ms Oo w 3 o d5 09 ACR scale factor Kp 0 000 4 000 1 000 d5 10 X ACR integration coeff Ki 0 000 4 000 1 000 d5 11 Pre excitation time 0 000s 5 000s 0 200s d5 14 digital setting Alt d5 12 Limitation mode of electric torque ve EAI on IO expansion board X6 DI pulse input Communication d5 15 digital setting Alt d5 13 Limitation mode of braking torque MU x EAI on IO expansion board X6 DI pulse input Communication ebb eye PPPPPPPPIE x d5 14 Digital setting of electric torque limit 0 0 200 0 180 094 value d5 15 ee setting of braking torque limit 0 200 0 180 094 d5 16 Flux weakening torque limit coeff 0 0 100 0 50 0 d5 17 Electric slip compensation gain 10 0 300 0 100 0 d5 18 Brake slip compensation gain 10 0 300 0 100 0 Group E Enhancement Function and Protection Parameters Group EO Enhancement Function lt 15kW 0 7kHz 16 0kHz factory default 8 0 kHz 18 5kKW 45kW TkHz 10 0kHz fact fault Model E0 00 Carrier frequency E s VtpegtaetoDperen wi 55kW 75kW 0 7kHz 16 0kHz factory default 84 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory Bp D NEN au 0 7kHz 3 0kHz factory d
68. 00 0 OV 480V for drives 380V level 380V Model 0A 0 0A 6553 5A defined 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 50 00Hz oO Model 0 65535r min Model 0 0010 65 5350 defined Model 4mH 6553 0 1mH 6553 5mH denied 0 0010 65 5350 mode defined 81 x Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory default Model d3 10 Mutual inductance L2 of motor 2 0 1mH 6553 5mH l defined Model d3 11 No load current of motor 2 0 0A 6553 5A defined d3 12 Flux weakening coeff 1 of motor 2 0 0000 1 0000 a defined d3 13 Flux weakening coeff 2 of motor 2 0 0000 1 0000 Mund defined Model d3 14 Flux weakening coeff 3 of motor 2 0 0000 1 0000 defined Reserved x Reserved x Reserved x Reserved x x E d3 21 0 No action d3 22 Parameter identification of motor 2 1 Static identification x 2 Rotating identification 0 No action Overload protection mode of motor 1 Judged from motor current d3 23 1 x 2 Judged from temperature transducer d3 24 Overload protection detection time poems Pope z of motor 2 0 Analog input Al1 d3 25 Input channel of temperature 1 Analog input AI2 transducer signal for motor 2 2 Analog input EAI on IO expansion card temperature transducer for motor 2 Group d4 V f Control Parameter of Motor 2 0 Linear V f 1 Various segments V f d4 01 d4 08 d4 00 _ __ V f curve setting 2 1 2nd power 3 1 4th power 4 1 6th power 5 1 8th power 82 GK600 User Man
69. 0096 15096 20096 Fig 6 40 Overload protection curve for ordinary motor running at 10Hz Input channel of temperature d0 25 P p Range 0 2 Factory default 1 transducer signal of motor 1 0 Al1 1 Al2 2 EAI When d0 23 is set to 2 judged from temperature transducer the analog signal input 168 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters channel of temperature sensor of motor 1 is set by this parameter The drive compares the signal input value via this analog channel with the thermal protection threshold set by d0 26 If it is bigger than the threshold the drive will immediately give an alarm of motor overload oL2 Protection through temperature sensor has no characteristic of inverse time lag curve Thermal protection threshold of Factory default d0 26 5 Range 0 00V 10 00V temperature transducer of motor 1 10 00V This parameter is set with d0 25 setting the overload protection point of motor 1 When the input analog signal through the channel selected by d0 25 is bigger than this threshold the drive will immediately give an alarm of motor overload oL2 Group d1 V f Control Parameters of Motor 1 Set control parameters in Group d1 when motor 1 is selected as current load motor on which V f control is performed d1 00 V f curve setting Range 0 8 Factory default 0 Set the relation between output voltage and output frequency of the drive when motor 1 is under V f control 0 Linear V f Applies t
70. 1 F1 F1 Multi step frequency 5 F 1 07 Multi step frequency 6 F 1 08 Multi step frequency 7 F 1 09 Multi step frequency 8 F1 10 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 Z O O O Z Z 2a Z Z FF FF OFF FF FF O Multi step frequency 4 F1 06 N N N N N O O Multi step frequency 9 F1 11 Multi step frequency 10 OEE F1 12 Multi step frequency 11 F1 13 Multi step frequency 12 SE F1 14 Z O Z 2a Z Z y 9 Communication Upper computer is the master frequency command source of the drive through standard RS485 communication interface on the drive refer to Group HO and appendix on this manual for further information about communication protocol and programming etc O Z O TI TI 2a O Z 2444 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ATTENTION Master frequency command can be forcibly switched to b0 02 via terminal master frequency command switched to digital setting bO 02 When this terminal is disabled master frequency command is determined by b0 01 When terminal is enabled master frequency command shall be the value of b0 02 b0 02 Digital setting of master Range lower limit frequency Factory default frequency upper limit frequency 50 00Hz When master frequency command source b0 01 is set to either O or 1 this parameter value will be the initial value of master frequency command Auxiliary frequenc Factory default command
71. 1 SEM Range 0 0s 10 0s holding time 1 0s When the digital output terminal contracting brake control outputs ON signal the frequency will be maintained the time set by EO 11 to ensure complete mechanism suction Then the drive will block the output and stop Group E1 Protection Parameters E1 00 Overvoltage stall Range 0 1 Factory default 1 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed When the motor is decelerating with a high inertia load or short term regenerative braking occurs during the running the energy feedback to the drive may raise DC bus voltage and thus resulting in overvoltage protection When this parameter value is set to 1 the drive will detect its bus voltage and compare with parameter set by E1 01 If the bus voltage exceeds value of E1 01 drive output frequency shall be adjusted instantaneously and the deceleration time shall be automatically prolonged to maintain the stability of DC bus voltage Set this parameter to O if frequency 187 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual fluctuation or Decel time prolonging is not allowed Overvoltage stall protection Factory default E1 01 did Range 12096 15096 i voltage 135 This value is a percentage compared to standard DC bus voltage E1 02 Undervoltage stall Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Under momentary voltage drop or momentary power loss the drive will accordingly drop output frequency and compensate the voltage drop vi
72. 1 connection abnormal EC1 Expansion board 2 connection abnormal EC2 Drive line connection abnormal dLC External equipment error PEr Consecutive running time attained to2 Accumulative running time attained fault to3 Power supply abnormal during running SUE Parameter copy fault CPy Software version compatibility failure SFt CPU interference fault CPU Reference protection oCr 5V power supply out of limit SP 1 Undervoltage protection LoU 2 Please use automatic fault reset function with caution or fault expansion may occur 190 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Factory default E1 11 Relay action on drive fault Range 000 111 010 Units place when undervoltage fault occurs 0 No action 1 Action enabled Set whether or not fault relay acts when undervoltage occurs Decade when fault locked 0 No action 1 Action enabled Set whether or not the relay acts when the fault locked at latest power loss after power up Hundred s place time of automatic reset 0 No action 1 Action enabled Set whether or not the relay is to operate when fault occurs in automatic reset status E1 12 Cooling fan control Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Auto run The fans run all the time during the running Determine if the fans continue to run or stop according to module temperature after stop 1 Always run The fans run all the time after applying power to the drive Drive therma
73. 13 Th d Hundred Running Linear Speed m s BITO PID Setting BITO AN1 V Set Frequency Hz Set Linear Speed m s BIT1 PID Feedback 96 External Counter Value BIT2 Set Length m DI BIT3 Actual Length m BIT3 Reserved Bus Voltage V Input Terminal Status Output Terminal Status Fig 4 14 Setting of hexadecimal parameter L 1 02 Under parameter setting status the parameter value cannot be modified if the value has no flashing digit Possible causes include 1 The parameter cannot be modified such as actual detection parameters running recording parameters etc 2 This parameter cannot be modified in running status but could be changed when motor stopped 3 Parameter under protection When parameter A0 02 is set to 1 parameters cannot be modified as the parameter protection against misoperation enabled To edit parameter in such a circumstance it is necessary to set A0 02 to 0 as first step 4 1 4 4 Lock Unlock Keypad Lock keypad All or some keys of KEYPAD can be locked by any of the following three methods See the definition of parameter LO 01 for further information Method 1 set the parameter value of LO 01 to non zero then press eee ONE LOS simultaneously Method 2 do not operate KEYPAD within five minutes after LO 01 is set to non zero Method 3 cut the power off and then applying power on after LO 01 parameter is set to non zero Refer to flow chart 4 15 for locking KEYPAD
74. 2096 15096 135 E1 02 Undervoltage stall E1 03 Overload alarm 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Unit s place detection option 0 Always detect 1 Detect at constant speed only Decade compared object 0 Rated current of motor 1 Rated current of drive Hundreds place alarm option 0 Alarm and continue to run 1 Protection enabled and coast to stop o e E1 04 Overload alarm threshold 20 0 200 0 130 0 A E1 05 PAEA alarm activated time that 0 1s 60 0s 5 0s exceeding threshold Protection action 1 E1 06 E1 07 Protection action 2 Unit s place reserved Decade temperature sampling disconnection action 0 Protection enabled and coast stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Hundreds place abnormal EEPROM 0 Protection enabled and coast stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Thousands place abnormal terminal communication 0 Protection enabled and coast stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Unit s place abnormal keypad communication 0 Protection enabled and coast stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Decade current detection circuit failed 0 Protection enabled and coast stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Hundreds place abnormal contactor 0 Protection enabled and coast stop 0000 0000 86 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory i A Parameter Designation Scope Aaa 1 Alarm and continue to run Thousands place input output phase 0 No protection for input phase loss
75. 5 r min S 5 en model defined Stat ist R1 of Factory default aic ora Range 0 0010 65 5350 ei motor 2 model defined Leakage induct L1 of Factory default oa ahve ial ob Range 0 1mH 6553 5mH ud d motor 2 model defined Rot ist R2 of Factory default 5 094 Dons sere a Range 0 0010 65 5350 MAC motor 1 model defined Mutual i t L2 of Factory default deep ederent el ue eet T seeds ob A motor 2 model defined d3 11 X No load current of motor 2 Range 0 0A 6553 5A ipd ebd model defined d3 12 Flux weakening coeff 1 of Range 0 0000 1 0000 Factory QE motor 2 model defined 43 13 Flux weakening coeff 2 of Range 0 0000 1 0000 Factory cerae motor 2 model defined seu Flux weakening coeff 3 of Range 0 0000 1 0000 Factory Au motor 2 model defined P ter identificati f d3 22 Me USUS UOS Range 0 2 Factory default O motor 2 ti d3 23 S QU Prorecori moa Range 0 2 Factory default 1 of motor 2 Overl tecti F fault SET UM eode iae epu Range 0 1min 15 0min stile detection time of motor 2 5 0min 0 2 Input channel of temperature transducer Range 0 Factory default 0 signal of motor 2 180 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Thermal protection threshold of temperature Range 0 00V 10 00V Factory default transducer for motor 2 10 00V Group d4 V f Control Parameters of Motor 2 Set control parameters in Group d4 when motor 2 is selected as current loaded motor on which V f control is perfor
76. 9c01 0x5cc0 0x5d80 0x9d41 0x5f00 0x9fc1 0x9681 0x5e40 0x5a00 0x9ac1 0x9b81 0x5b40 0x9901 0x59c0 0x5880 0x9841 0x8801 0x48c0 0x4980 0x8941 0x4b00 0x8bc1 0x8a81 0x4a40 0x4e00 0x8ec1 0x8f81 0x4f40 0x8d01 0x4dc0 0x4c80 0x8c41 0x4400 0x84c1 0x8581 0x4540 0x8701 0x47c0 0x4680 0x8641 0x8201 0x42c0 0x4380 0x8341 258 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol 0x4100 0x81c1 0x8081 0x4040 259 GiAKE mail JIANGSU GTAKE ELECTRIC CO LTD No 3058 Jintong Road Nantong City Jiangsu Province Tel 86 0513 86221802 Fax 86 0513 86221809 JIANGSU GTAKE ELECTRIC CO LTD SHENZHEN BRANCH Building 10 Zhong yun tai Industrial Park Tangtou Road NO 1 Bao an District Shenzhen Guangdong Province China Tel 86 0755 86392609 Fax 86 0755 86392603 Http www gtake com cn Copyright 2011 JIANGSU GTAKE ELECTRIC CO LTD All rights reserved We reverse the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice Code 34 01 0029 Version A00
77. C The time unit is set by thousand s place of F2 00 ATTENTION Digital input terminals simple PLC paused simple PLC disabled and simple PLC stop memory clear can be used during the running of simple PLC See specification of digital input of Group CO for details Group F3 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count Wobble frequency function is usually used in textile and chemical fiber industries where traverse motion is required Wobble frequency control process is as follows accelerate to the pre frequency of wobble frequency function according to the current Accel time Maintain this frequency for a period of time and run to center frequency of wobble frequency according to the current Accel Decel time i e the set frequency set by parameter group b0 Then run in a cyclic manner according to wobble frequency amplitude hopping frequency wobble frequency cycle time and frequency ramp up time When a stop command is given the drive will ramp down to stop according to the set Decel time 209 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Output frequency Wobble frequency Hop frequency positive amplitude jd Wobble frequency 4 x negative amplitude Upper limit of wobble frequency Center frequency lt t 9 tX Lower limit of wobble frequency Z 4 NX ik Pre wobble frequency Triangular wave rise time i i Time l i
78. CS 0 0 0 6 CA 1 0 0 6 50 00 E gt A0 01 Fig 4 11 Flow chart of user password setting ATTENTION User s password is successfully set when step 8 finished but will not take effect until the completion of step 9 Password authentification In non parameter edit status press WP to enter first tier display A0 00 then press NX to enter second tier display 0 0 0 0 Keypad will implement the display of other parameters only when correct password entered Clear password Upon the successful password authentication access password setting code AO0 00 Password can be cleared by writing value 0000 into AO 00 for twice Example of parameter setting Example 1 modify upper limit frequency from 600Hz to 50Hz change b0 09 from 600 00 to 50 00 1 In non parameter edit status press 2 Press i to move flashing digit to modification bit A flashes 3 Press 2 once to change A to b 4 Press 9 to move flashing to modification bit 0 in unit s place flashing 5 Press nine times to change 0 to 9 6 Press NX to view the parameter value 600 00 of b0 09 T Press A to move flashing digit to modification digit 6 flashing 8 Press six times to change 6 to O UN uc display current parameter A0 00 57 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual 9 Press A once to move flashing digit rightwards by one bit 10 Press 4 for five times to change 0 to 5 11 Pr
79. GIAKE Em User Manual GK600 Series General Purpose AC Motor Drives Preface Thank you for choosing GTAKE GK600 Series General Purpose AC Motor Drives This user manual presents a detailed description of GK600 series with respect to product features structural characteristics functions installation parameter setting troubleshooting commissioning and daily maintenance etc Be sure to carefully read through the safety precautions before use and use this product on the premise that personnel and equipment safety is ensured IMPORTANT NOTES Please assure the intactness of product enclosure and all safety covers before installation Operation must conform to the requirements of this manual and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes Contents of this manual may be subject to appropriate modification as a result of product upgrade specification change and update of the manual In the event of damage or loss of user manual users may ask local distributors offices or our Technical Service Department for a new one If any item as stated in this manual is not clear please contact our Technical Service Department If any anomaly occurs after power up or during the operation it is essential to stop the machine and identify the fault or seek technical services as soon as possible Telephone number of our Technical Service Department 0755 86392662 Table of Contents PACS 4 P
80. Jxny pueuuuoo boy jepxne pueujuioo bay JejseuJ uro Jo3uoo qid sseooJg indui esind q 9Xx Iv3 1ndui Bojeuy sixe A xewbeai4xny au 80 08 ZIV indui Bojeuy boy wnwxew 80 04 LIV indui Bojeuy puewwos boy Aveyixne puewwoo bay JejseuJ xe N o jueunsnf pe NMOQ dn IJeuruuei 70 0g pueuiuoo erg puewwos boy Aueyixny lt e a O jueunsn pe A V pedA y v0 0q Humes jey 6iq Jeuiu93 YO o si nd no pueuiuoo on 0q Bumes ejBip 0 payoyms puewwoo bay Aselixny Q o uoneoiunuJulo2 6 jndjno 5 5 peeds dejs niny 043009 bau dejs niniw o jndino 91d Jouoo bad 31d Z JEUILUI9 Z0 o jndino did 0 009 Qld Sse20Jd 0q Bumes jey 61p 0 peuoyAs pueuuioo ba Ja seyy 9 m d d 62 puewwoo 5 0 ynau asind q 9x OS Jaysew beJ4 o 0 T L Iv3 1ndui Bojeuy 10 0q uondo uonejnduio lt 20 04 gt eIv indui Bojeuy Liv ndu Bojpeuy juaujsn pe L NMOQ dn leuw z0 09 Bues jeubiq jueunsn pe ped ex zo oq Humes jey 6iq 110 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Frequency command Factory default b0 00 E y Range 0 4 B i pattern 0 0 Master frequency command Output frequency of drive is determined by master frequency command source b0 01 Refer to parameters b0 01 and b0 02 for further information Master amp auxiliary computation result Frequency command is the result of master
81. KBU BX1 2 8 External Dimensions of Keypad Bracket Where keypad KBU BX1 needs to be remotely used located on the electric control cabinet it should be provided with a bracket to support and need to open a hole in the cabinet Bracket model is KBU DZ1 whose external dimensions are shown in Fig 2 6 a Fig 2 6 b shows applicable hole dimensions in the cabinet Q7 4 01 8 pa 735 13 2 j ff D I A f Y Panel TH Hole WTH ll 1 1 uc 1 2mm 73 2mm 1 5mm 74 4mm 2mm 75 5mm qu rm Y a External dimensions of KBU DZ1 b Hole dimensions in the cabinet Fig 2 6 External dimensions of KBU DZ1 and cabinet hole dimensions 17 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 1 Installation Environment 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ambient temperature is in the range of 10 C 50 Drive should be installed on surface of flame retardant object with adequate surrounding space for heat dissipation Installation should be performed where vibration is less than 5 9m s 0 69 Protect from moisture and direct sunlight Protect the cooling fan by avoiding oil dust and metal particles Do not expose to an atmosphere with flammable gases corrosi
82. Leakage current passes through the line to line and ground distributed capacitors at input amp output sides of drive and its size is associated with the capacitance of distributed capacitor and the carrier frequency Leakage current is classified into ground leakage current and line to line leakage current Ground leakage current not only circulates inside drive system but may also influence other 44 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring equipment via ground loop Such a leakage current may result in malfunction of RCD and other equipment The higher the carrier frequency of drive is the bigger the ground leakage current would be The longer the motor cables and the bigger the parasitic capacitance are the bigger the ground leakage current would be Therefore the most immediate and effective method for suppression of ground leakage current is to reduce carrier frequency and minimize the length of motor cables The higher harmonics of line to line leakage current that passes through between cables at output side of drive will Accel the aging of cables and may bring about malfunction of other equipment The higher the carrier frequency of drive is the bigger the line to line leakage current would be The longer the motor cables and the bigger the parasitic capacitance are the bigger the line to line leakage current would be Therefore the most immediate and effective method for suppression of ground leakage current is to
83. Minimum input Point A Point B input v of curve 2 input C2 09 Minimum input of PointAinput Point B input C2 11 C2 07 curve 2 C2 11 C2 07 C2 09 Fig 6 29 Fig 6 30 Corresponding set value Corresponding set value A Set value that corresponds to minimum input of curve 2 C2 12 Set value that corresponds N Point A input Set value corresponds to to minimum input of curve 2 i C2 07 point A input C2 08 C2 12 Set value corresponds to point B input C2 10 Set value corresponds to ou ee point A input C2 08 l Point B input Maximum input of E value that eee Al analog l C2 09 curve 2 C2 05 o maximum input of curve Al analo C2 06 Maximum input of Minimum input of g curve 2 C2 05 Set value corresponds to curve 2 C2 11 N point B input C2 10 re deca ME dc RN Minimum input of PointAinput Point B input Set value that corresponds curve 2 C2 11 C2 07 C2 09 to maximum input of curve 2 x C2 06 Fig 6 31 157 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual RO Coal TES een aie eae Range input of inflection Factory default point A of curve 3 110 0 100 0 Set value corresponding to Factory default C2 14 E COITSsponeing o ange 100 0 100 0 sj maximum input of curve 3 100 0 Range input of inflection Input of inflection point A of C2 15 aces point B of curve 3 Factory default 0 0 maximum input of curve 3 Set value corresponding to C2 16
84. Multi step frequency 10 F1 12 Multi step frequency 11 N 9 F1 13 Multi step frequency 12 nd F1 14 Multi step frequency 13 OFF ON F1 15 Multi step frequency 14 s F1 16 Multi step frequency 15 F1 17 19 Accel Decel time determinant 1 20 Accel Decel time determinant 2 Accel Decel time determinant 1 2 can realize at most 4 Accel Decel time settings through combination of different statuses as shown in Table 6 8 Accel Decel time can be switched via different combinations during running ON O O Z uH Z O O O O TI TI uH Z O O Z O Z Z Z Z Z O TI TI O Z 138 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Table 6 8 Accel Decel time Accel Decel time Accel Decel time determinant 2 determinant 1 Accel Decel time 1 b2 01 OFF OFF b2 02 Accel Decel time 2 b2 03 uii b2 04 ON Accel Decel time 3 b2 05 b2 06 Accel Decel time 4 b2 07 b2 08 ATTENTION gt The selection of Accel Decel time 1 4 is not determined by digital input terminals when the drive is running under simple PLC See parameter Group F2 for details When broken line Accel Decel is enabled Accel Decel time is automatically switched to Accel Decel time 1 and 2 according to switching frequency b2 13 and b2 14 In this case Accel Decel time determinant terminals are disabled 21 Accel Decel disabled ramp stop not inclusive When Accel Decel disabled terminal is enabled the drive
85. RA RC NO Relay RA RB RC Control board output relay output Contact capacity 250VAC 3A 30VDC 3A 485 485 differential Rate signal 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200bps Terminal 485 differential Maximum distance 500m standard network 485 i 485 signal cable used Interface 485 GND communication Isolated from COM interiorly shield grounding Keypad Maximum communication distance is 15m 485 pase when connected to Keypad interface Use standard network cable 3 9 Control Terminal Usage 3 9 1 Lay out of Control Terminals NEA NL LA L JT XL JT ANS Vy X LI J UY NU NU ALY 10V AO1 485 485 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 DI GND AI1 AI2 GND 24V PLC COM Y1 Y2 DO COM Fig 3 14 Lay out of control terminals 3 9 2 Control Terminal Screw and Wiring Requirement Table 3 6 Terminal screw and wiring specification Cable type Cable requirement mm Torque kgf cm 3 9 3 Instructions of Analog Input Output Terminals Being particularly vulnerable to noise analog input amp output si
86. Range 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 C b Factory default UO 33 Inverter bridge temperature Range 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 C 5 U0 34 U0 34 Range 0 6 Factory default 0 When the drive reports fault FAL the fault source can be known by U0 34 No fault source FAL itself 5V fault Ground fault OC fault OU fault Other sources U0 35 Terminal count value Range 0 65535 Factory default 0 UO 36 Run command record at LoU Range 0 1 Factory default 0 OOA WN O UO 37 Fault code record at LoU Range 0 100 Factory default 0 221 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual UO 39 Current detection fault source Range 0 3 Factory default O 0 No fault source 1 IU 2 IV 3 IW Higher place numeric of 5 Range 0 65 Factory default 0 actual length Lower place numeric of U0 41 5 Range 0 65535 Factory default 0 actual length Higher place numeric of U0 42 Range 1 1 Factory default 0 keypad V stored value Lower place numeric of Factory default r Range 0 00 655 35Hz A keypad V stored value 0 00Hz Higher place numeric of terminal UP DOWN stored jedes Factory default 0 value Lower place numeric of terminal UP DOWN stored Range 0 00 655 35 Hz value Center FREQ of wobble Factory default toca a B Range 0 600 00 Hz b FREQ 0 00 Hz Group U1 Fault Record U1 00 Code of the latest fault Range 0 45 Factory default 0 Running frequency when the Factory defaul
87. Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 08 Decel time 4 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s These parameters b2 01 b2 08 set the rate of Accel Decel for speed increase decrease Maximum Freq b0 08 Accel time X Accel Rate X Maximum Freq b0 08 Decel time X z Decel Rate X As the formula sets forth above Accel time means required time for drive to Accelerate to maximum frequency b0 08 from zero frequency while Decel time refers to the time required for drive to Decelerate to zero frequency from maximum frequency b0 08 These four types of Accel Decel time can be selected through the ON OFF combination of DI terminals Accel Decel time determinant 1 and Accel Decel time determinant 2 See Table 6 5 128 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Table 6 5 Accel Decel time Accel Decel time l Accel Decel time determinant 2 determinant 1 Accel Decel time 1 b2 01 b2 02 Accel Decel time 3 b2 05 b2 06 Accel Decel time 4 b2 07 b2 08 EF EF ON ON ATTENTION gt When the drive is running under simple PLC the Accel time and Decel time are determined by simple PLC related parameters not by the DI terminals See Group F2 for details gt When Accel Decel of broken line style is selected Accel Decel time is automatically switched to Accel Decel time 1 and 2 according to switching frequency b2 13 and b2 14 Under this circumstance Accel Decel time selection terminals are disabled Decel time for Fac
88. Start at End at least least 3 5 idle Slave Parameter Data Check 3 5 idle characters address characters RTU In RTU mode idle time between frames can be set through function code or comply with Modbus internal convention for which the minimum interframe idle is as follows 1 Frame header and end define the frame by making bus idle time equal to or longer than 3 5 byte time 2 After the start of frame the clearance between characters must be less than 1 5 character communication time or the newly received characters will be treated as the header of the new frame 3 Data check employs CRC 16 and the whole information participates in the check the high and low bytes of check sum shall be sent after exchange Please refer to examples at the end of protocol for details of CRC check 4 The bus idle time of at least 3 5 characters or set minimum bus idle time shall be maintained between frames and needs not to accumulate the starting and ending idle time The data frame of which the request frame is reading parameter 002 of 1 machine is as below Appendix Table 1 Register Address Function code Read words Check sum Ta 0002 02 00 01 25 CA Response frame of 1 machine is as below 239 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Appendix Table 2 Register Address Function code Read words Check sum ASCII 1 Frame header is Ox3A while the default frame end is OxOD OxOA also
89. TO AI1 V BIT1 AI2 V BIT2 EAI V BIT3 Reserved Hundreds place BITO PID setting BIT1 PID feedback BIT2 Set length m BIT3 Actual length m Thousands place BITO Running linear speed m s BIT1 Set linear speed m s BIT2 External count value BIT3 DI Note when this function code is set to 0000 the set frequency would be displayed as default Hz Example To display command frequency bus voltage Al1 sampled value set length and external count value L1 02 should be 0100 0100 0001 0011 i e set L1 02 to 4413 Factory default L1 03 Linear speed coeff Range 0 1 999 9 2 100 096 This coefficient is used for calculation of linear speed Running linear speed motor running speed x L1 03 Set linear speed z motor setting speed x L1 03 Both running linear speed and set linear speed can be viewed during running and stop 218 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Group U Monitoring Group UO Status Monitoring All parameters of Group UO are for display purpose only and can t be set Factory default UO 00 Running frequency Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz p Factory default 0 00Hz Factory default UO 02 Bus voltage Range 0V 65535V Factory default UO 03 Output voltage Range 0V 65535V Factory default UO 04 Output current Range 0 0A 6553 5A ae b Factory default UO 05 Output torque Range 0 096 300 096 0 0 b o Factory default U0 06 Out
90. Table 35 Register Number of Number of Check Address Parameter address registers data bytes eee te eee ee ee 10H writes that the data of multiple registers are not saved Master enquiry 255 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Appendix Table 36 Register Number of Number of Check Address Parameter i Data address registers data bytes code Number of 05 10 XX XX 0001 0004 l XX XX XX XX 2 registers Slave response Appendix Table 37 Number of Address Parameter Register address i Check code registers Number of 2 05 10 XX XX registers Register address 00 00 1E 04 62 00 62 14 Number of registers 00 01 00 04 Number of data bytes 02 08 Data n is equal to 2 x the number of registers 1 Example Parameter 10H is used here to write the corresponding write data 1 6 and 0 in control registers 0x6200 0x6201 and 0x6202 of 5 slave Appendix Table 38 Register Number of Number of Check Address Parameter address registers data bytes EAE E e a 08H communication line diagnosis Master enquiry Appendix Table 39 Slave response Appendix Table 40 Subfunction Address Function code E Data Check code ELEM table of line diagnosis sub parameter 256 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol Example Parameter 08H is used here to set the communication no response mode of 5 slave Appendix Table 41 00 04 00 00 AO 4E ow
91. This parameter defines the bundled combination of three run command sources and frequency command sources with the purpose of facilitating simultaneous switching For example frequency command source Al1 unit s place of b1 01 is set to 3 bundled with keypad control while the frequency command source X6 DI pulse input ten s place of b1 01 is set to 6 bundled with terminal control In such a case when run command is controlled by keypad frequency command source would be Al1 while when run command is controlled via terminals frequency command source will be automatically switched to X6 DI pulse input Unit s place frequency command source bundled under keypad control 0 No binding 1 Digital setting b0 02 A V adjustment on keypad 2 Digital setting b0 02 terminal UP DOWN adjustment 3 Analog input AI1 4 Aanalog input Al2 5 Analog input EAI on IO expansion board 6 X6 DI pulse input 7 Process PID output 8 Simple PLC 9 Multi step frequency A Communication input Refer to parameter b0 01 for details regarding above mentioned sources of frequency command Decade frequency command source bundled under terminal control Same as unit s place 123 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Hundreds place frequency command source bundled under communication control same as unit s place ATTENTION gt Different run command sources can be bundled with the same frequency command source gt The
92. UP DOWN adjustment 3 Analog input AI1 4 Analog input Al2 5 Analog input EAI on IO expansion Binding of run command and board frequency command 6 X6 DI pulse input 7 Process PID output 8 Simple PLC 9 Multi step frequency A Communication input Decade frequency command source bundled under terminal control same as unit s place Hundreds place frequency command source bundled under communication control Same as unit s place righe B T L5 b1 02 Running direction RUE OIN SIR 1 Reverse 0 Reverse enabled b1 03 Reverse disabled iR eversa disabled b1 04 Dead time of forward and reverse 0 0s 3600 0s b1 05 Start method 0 From start frequency 68 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory S ee 2 Start based on speed search 0 00Hz x b1 07 Holding time of start frequency b1 08 DC braking current when start 0 096 100 0 6 0 096 b1 09 DC braking time when start 0 00s 30 00s_ n 000s A b1 11 Speed search Decel time 0 1s 20 0s b1 12 V f coefficient during speed search 20 0 100 0 100 0 0 Ramp to stop b1 13 Stop method 1 Coast to stop x 2 Ramp to stop DC brake b1 14 jStart frequency of DC brake stop 0 00Hz upper limit frequency 0 00Hz bi 15 Brakecurent 0 0 100 0 0 0 A b1 16 Brake time 0 00s 30 00s 000s A E nh 0 Disabled b1 17 Overexcitation brake 1 Enabled 0 Disabled b1 18 Dynamic brake 1 En
93. Vulnerable Parts Vulnerable parts of drive include cooling fan electrolytic capacitor relay or contactor etc The service lives of these parts are subject to environment and working conditions To maintain a favorable operating environment is conducive to improving the service life of parts and components routine inspection and maintenance also contributes to effective improvement of parts service life To prolong the service life of entire drive the cooling fan electrolytic capacitor relay or contactor and other vulnerable parts should be subjected to routine inspection according to the table below Please replace the abnormal parts if any in time 235 Chapter 8 Maintenance GK600 User Manual Vulnerable EM er Service life Cause of damage Criteria parts Check if fan blades have Wear of bearing and cracks aging of blade Check if there is abnormal vibration and noise on working 30 000 40 000h Excessively high Check if there is liquid leakage ambient temperature Check if safety valve projects and excessively low Electrolytic Check if capacitance value is 7 40 000 50 000h air pressure result in P capacitor out of allowable range electrolyte P Check if insulation resistance volatilization aging of is abnormal electrolyte capacitor Corrosion and dust impairs the contactin Relay cont 50 000 100 000 J Open close failure effect of contact actor times False alarm of CCL fault excessively frequent
94. a the energy feedback from load so as to maintain consecutive running no trip This function applies to fans and centrifugal pumps and such Factory default E1 03 Overload alarm Range 000 111 n Es is Unit s place detection option 0 Always detect Overload alarm works all the time during drive running 1 Detect at constant speed only Overload pre alarm only works during constant speed running of inverter Decade compared object 0 Rated current of motor Compared object is the rated current relative to motor and display oL2 when the alarm is given under this setting 1 Rated current of drive Compared object is the rated current of drive and display oL 1 when the alarm is given under this setting Hundreds place alarm option 0 Alarm and continue to run When drive output current exceeds the level set by E1 04 and the lasting time attains parameter value of E1 05 the drive will alarm but continue its running 1 Protection enabled and coast to stop When drive output current exceeds the level set by E1 04 and the lasting time attains parameter value of E 1 05 the drive will display overload fault and coast to stop Factory default E1 04 Overload alarm threshold Range 20 0 200 0 mie 0 a o When 0 is set at decade of E1 03 this set value is a percentage compared to rated current of motor When 1 is set of that this set value is a percentage compared to rated current of drive 188 GK600 Use
95. abled hoe b1 19 Dynamic brake threshold voltage 650V 750V 720V Auto restart when power up again 0 Disabled b1 20 x after power loss 1 Enabled b1 21 Waiting time o auto restart when 0 0s 10 0s o0 power up again Group b2 Accel Decel Parameters Accel Decel time resolution pn b2 01 Accel time 1 s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 02 Decel time 1 s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s 2 03 Accel time 2 s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 04 Decel time 2 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 05 Accel time 3 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 06 Decel time 3 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 07 Accel time 4 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 08 Decel time 4 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s Tuer p UN when emergency stop 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 10 Jog Accel time 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s b2 11 Jog Decel time 0s 600 00s 6000 0s 60000s 69 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory A Parameter Designation Scope default 0 Linear Accel Decel 1 Broken line Accel Decel Accel Decele curve 2 S curve Accel Decel A x 3 S curve Accel Decel B 4 S curve Accel Decel C Accel time switching frequency of b2 13 broker Tine Acca D ace 0 00Hz maximum frequency 0 00Hz a Decel time switching frequency of b2 14 breikandme Actel Detel 0 00Hz maximum frequency 0 00Hz A Time of initial t of Accel bos loo eee IOSJUS 60 00s Serv A 0 20s e S curve Time of last t of Accel Bois Weer os gene ee 0 00s 60 00s S curve A 0 20s m S curve Time o
96. al ATTENTION When analog input channel of auxiliary frequency command is the same with that of master frequency command analog input channel of auxiliary frequency command would be disabled See b0 05 and b0 06 for information about frequency relation that corresponds to maximum value of analog input of auxiliary frequency command 6 X6 DI pulse input Auxiliary frequency command is determined by pulse frequency via terminal X6 DI only In such a case set X6 DI terminal to pulse input set C0 06 to 24 Refer to C2 24 C2 27 for corresponding relationship between pulse frequency and command frequency ATTENTION gt n case X6 DI pulse input is also set for master frequency command source the pulse input for auxiliary frequency command shall be disabled gt See b0 05 and b0 06 for information about frequency relation that corresponds to maximum value of pulse input for auxiliary frequency command 7 Process PID output Auxiliary frequency command is determined by process PID computation result See parameter Group FO for details ATTENTION n case PID output is also set for master frequency command the process PID output for auxiliary frequency command would be disabled gt See b0 05 and b0 06 for information about frequency relation that corresponds to maximum value of process PID output for auxiliary frequency command 8 PLC Auxiliary frequency command is determined by simple PLC See parameter Group F2 for detai
97. al PLC step completed outputs ON signal 500ms When simple PLC finishes a running cycle digital output terminal PLC cycle completed outputs ON signal 500ms Running mode of simple Factory default Range 0000 1212 PLC 0000 Unit s place PLC running mode 0 Stop after a single cycle PLC stops upon the completion of one cycle and it won t be started unless another run command is given shown as Fig 6 50 200 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters I M i P 4 n4 i i4 i4 i4 i4 P 4 4 TO T141 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 Pulse length 500ms bS l l l PLC step completed PLC cycle completed Run command Fig 6 50 1 Continue to run with the last frequency after a single cycle After the completion of one cycle PLC maintains the running frequency and direction of the last step See the figure below e a rere rt T8 79 7T10 711 7T12 T13 714715 PLC step completed Pulse length 500ms PLC cycle completed Moo Run command Fig 6 51 201 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual 2 Repeat cycles PLC automatically starts the another cycle after finishing one until there is a stop command shown as Fig 6 52 IE
98. ame as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 04 Runningtimeofstep 1 0 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 2 F1 04 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 2 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 06 Runningtimeofstep2 O Os min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 3 F1 05 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 3 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 08 Running time of step 3 0 0s min 6000 0s min 0 0s F2 09 Setting of step 4 Unit s place frequency setting I oo fx 91 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory P D Attr arameter esignation Scope default 0 Multi step frequency 4 F1 06 1 7 Same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 0 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 5 F1 07 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 5 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 12 Runningtimeofstep5 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 6 F1 08 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 6 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time optio
99. amp auxiliary computation The master amp auxiliary computation relation is determined by b0 07 Main command is set by b0 01 while auxiliary is set by b0 03 Switch between master frequency command and auxiliary frequency command When b0 00 is set to 2 the switch between master frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result can be realized through digital input terminal frequency command switchover When terminal frequency command switchover is invalid command frequency of the drive will be determined by b0 01 When terminal frequency command switchover is valid command frequency of the drive will be determined by b0 03 Auxiliary frequency command source Switch between master frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result When b0 00 is set to 3 command frequency will de determined by master frequency command or master amp auxiliary computation result through digital input terminal frequency command switchover When terminal frequency command switchover is invalid command frequency is determined by b0 01 master frequency command source When terminal frequency command switchover is valid command frequency is determined by master amp auxiliary computation result The master amp auxiliary computation relation is determined by b0 07 Switch between auxiliary frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result When b0 00 is set to 4 command frequency will de d
100. and other metal articles inside the drive Failure to comply may result in equipment damage gt Never modify the interior components of the drive in any condition Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Inspection items Measures Check if control terminal screws are loose Tighten Check if main circuit terminal screws are loose Tighten Check if ground terminal screws are loose Tighten Check if copper bar screws are loose Tighten Check if drive mounting screws are loose Tighten 234 GK600 User Manual Chapter 8 Maintenance Inspection items Measures Check if there are damage on power cables and Replace the damaged cables control cables Check if there is dust on circuit board Clear it up Check if air duct is blocked Clear it up Test the ground terminal with 500V megameter after all input and output terminals are short circuited via conductors Ground test on individual terminals is strictly prohibited since this may cause damage to inverter Check if drive insulation is damaged Remove input terminals U V W of motor from drive and test the Check if motor insulation is damaged motor alone with 500V megameter Failure to comply may result in drive damage Carry out power on test during which the voltage should be Check if the storage period of the drive is over two boosted to rated value gradually years using a voltage regulator be sure to run at no load for more than 5 hours 8 3 Replacement of
101. are divided into decimal DEC and hexadecimal HEX values When a parameter value is expressed by a hexadecimal all its bits are independent of each other during edition and the range of value would be O F Parameter value is composed of the unit decade hundreds and kilobit Shift Key 2 is used to select the bit to be changed while A and 99 are used to increase or decrease numerical value Example of parameter password setting Setting of password A0 00 is set to 1006 1 In non parameter edit status it displays current parameter A0 00 when pressing 2 Press UN to display parameter value 0000 that belongs to A0 00 3 Press for six times to change the rightmost digit 0 to 6 4 Press A to move the flashing digit to the leftmost bit 5 Press once to change 0 in leftmost bit to 1 6 Press WX to save the value of A0 00 then Keypad will switch to display the next parameter AO 01 7 Press WEN to change AO 01 to AO 00 8 Repeat steps 2 till 6 AO 01 will be displayed after keypad displaying P SEt 9 There are three methods for users to bring the password setting above into effect D Press Ze m m simultaneously PrtCt displayed won t operate keypad within 5 minutes 3 restart the drive 56 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions Flow chart of user password setting A0 00 Cv A0 01 CENT 1 0 0 6 CA 0 0 0 6 cp on Escape modification 0 0 0 0 CA D 0 0 0 6
102. as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 14 Running time of step 6 Range 0 0 6000 0s min duse Sets the running time of step 6 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 15 Setting of step 7 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 7 F1 09 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 16 Running time of step 7 Range 0 0 6000 0s min dis Sets the running time of step 7 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default 22 Setting of step 8 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 8 F1 10 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 206 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 18 Running time of step 8 Range 0 0 6000 0s min ane Sets the running time of step 8 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 19 Setting of step 9 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 9 F1 11 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundred s place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory defa
103. ation time 0 000s 8 000s 0 200 2 42 03 ins low speed proportional gain 0 0 20 0 d2 05 __ ASR switching frequency 1 0 00Hz d2 06 2 05 upper limiting frequency Oms 500 0ms Oms 500 0ms d2 09 _ ACR proportion coefficient Kp 0 000 4 000 d2 10 JjACRintegration coefficient Ki 0 000 4 000 x AM Z 80 GK600 User Manual Parameter d2 11 Pre excitation time Electric driven torque limitation source Limitation mode of braking torque Digital setting of electric driven torque Q N 2 15 d2 16 Electric driven slip compensation d2 17 i gain d2 18 d2 18 d3 00 J Type of motor 2 d3 01 Power rating of motor 2 d3 02 Rated voltage of motor 2 d3 03 Rated current of motor 2 d3 04 d3 05 Rated frequency of motor 2 Number of pole pairs of motor 2 d3 06 Rated speed of motor 2 d3 07 Stator resistance R1 of motor 2 d3 08 Leakage inductance L1 of motor 2 d3 09 Rotor resistance R2 of motor 2 Chapter 5 List of Parameters Scope 0 000s 5 000s 0 d2 14 digital setting 1 Analog input AI1 2 Analog input AI2 3 Analog input EAI on IO expansion board 4 X6 DI pulse input 5 Communication 0 d2 15 digital setting 1 Analog input AI1 2 Analog input AI2 3 Analog input EAI on IO expansion board 4 X6 DI pulse input 5 Communication 0 0 200 0 Digital setting of brake torque 0 0 200 0 T limit coefficient in f weakening 10 0 3
104. aximum frequency Hundreds place wobble frequency F3 01 Wobble frequency running setting 0000 x memorized when stop 0 Memory enabled 1 Memory disabled Thousands place wobble frequency memorized on power loss 0 Memory enabled 1 Memory disabled 0 100 0 of le f F3 07 Triangular wave ramp up time rco louse ape ODQISETE RO MC 0 096 cycle 0 m F3 09 A Length setting 0 65535 1000 F3 10 Number of pulses per meter 0 1 6553 5 100 0 94 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Not st F3 11 Command when the length attained E R i F3 12 Set count value 1 765535 F3 13 Designated count value 1 765535 Group H Communication Parameters Group HO MODBUS Communication Parameters 0 1000 terminal resistance not connected 1 1000 terminal resistance RS 485 port terminal resistance Decade data format 1 8 2 N format RTU 1 8 1 E format RTU 1 8 1 O Format RTU RS 485 port communication 0 1 2 3 1 7 2 N format ASCII 4 5 configuration 1 7 1 E format ASCII 1 7 1 O format ASCII Hundreds place connection type 0 Direct cable connection 232 485 1 MODEM 232 H0 02 RS 485 communication address 0 247 O is broadcast address HO 03 Time out detection 0 0s 1000 0s HO 04 Communication time delay Oms 1000ms 0 PC controls this drive H0 05 Master Slave option 1 As master HO 06 Parameter store address Proportional factor of received H0 07 frequency 0 0 100 0
105. before switch on switch off of the drive output and or contactor Failure to comply may result in equipment damage 1 1 5 Maintenance gt gt gt Only qualified technicians are allowed to implement the maintenance and troubleshooting Never implement the maintenance and troubleshooting before power supply has been turned off and discharged completely Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personal injury To avoid an electric shock hazard wait at least 10 minutes after the power has been turned off and make sure the residual voltage of the bus capacitors has discharged to OV before performing any work on the drive After the replacement of the drive be sure to perform the same procedures in strict accordance with above noted rules GK600 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Precautions AN ATTENTION gt Do not touch the electric components with bare hands during maintenance and troubleshooting Failure to do this may result in component damage due to ESD gt All pluggable components can be inserted or pulled out only when power has been turned off 1 2 Other Considerations 1 2 1 Input Power Supply This series of drives are not applicable to applications out the range of operating voltage as set forth in this manual If necessary please use booster to rise or drop the voltage to regulated voltage range This series of drives only apply to AC three phase input voltage AC two phase voltage
106. bound Range 0 00Hz maximum FREQ 25 00Hz l Factory default C1 13 FDT2 lower bound Range 0 00Hz maximum FREQ 24 00Hz These parameters should be set with digital output terminals FDT1 and FDT2 Take FDT1 for example the drive outputs ON signal when output frequency exceeds upper 151 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual bound of FDT1 and will not output OFF signal unless output frequency drops to below lower bound of FDT1 Please set C1 10 to be larger to some certain extent than C1 11 avoiding status change frequently See Fig 6 22 152 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Output frequency FDT1 upper limit FDT1 lower limit Time FDT1 terminal Time Fig 6 22 C1 44 Detection width of Range 0 00Hz maximum Factory default frequency attained FREQ 2 50Hz This parameter should be set with digital output terminal frequency attained When the difference between output frequency and command frequency is less than this value terminal frequency attained aoutputs ON See Fig 6 23 Output Command frequency Frequency detection width Time Frequency attained terminal Time Fig 6 23 153 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Zero current detection Factory default C1 15 Range 0 0 50 0 b level 5 096 We Factory default C1 16 A Zero current detection time Range 0 01s 50 00s 0 50s The two parameters should be
107. cel time is too Prolong the Accel Decel short time Set the parameters correctly according to motor nameplate Output short circuit Check motor connection phase to phase short and output ground 221 Motor parameters are improperly set Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK600 User Manual Fault Fault DE Fault description Causes Solutions code Display circuit and output ground impedance short circuit Load is too heavy Reduce the load Inappropriate V f curve under V f control Set V f curve correctly Reduce current limited value or start through speed search Torque boost is too big Reduce torque boost under V f control value Inappropriate V f curve inder Viesntrol Set V f curve correctly Set the parameters correctly according to motor nameplate Restart the rotating motor Motor parameters are improperly set Motor Improper setting of motor Properly set the motor overloaded overloaded protection overloaded protection time time Identify the causes of motor stalling or check the load condition Motor stalled or sharp variation of load Long term running of ordinary motor at low speed with heavy load Abnormal connection of Seek services control board Switching power suppl i g P PPly Seek services detection damaged abnormal Hall device damaged Output leak 7 groune Ss dus Seek services current is too big Output ground Check motor connection s Output connection short circuit NUS and o
108. ck hazard Prior to the running of the drive check there is no person in surrounding area who can reach the motor so as to prevent personal injury Chapter 1 Safety Precautions GK600 User Manual During the running of the drive foreign bodies should be prevented dropping into the equipment Failure to comply may result in faults and or equipment damage Only qualified technicians familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives are allowed to perform signal test during operation Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personal injury Never change the drive parameters at will Failure to comply may result in equipment damage AN ATTENTION Make sure the number of phases of power supply and rated voltage are consistent with product nameplate If not contact the seller or GTAKE Check there are no short circuits in peripheral circuits connected with the drive and make sure the connection is tight Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Make sure the motor and associated machinery are within allowable range of service prior to operation Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Never touch fans heat sink and braking resistor with bare hands Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personal injury It is not allowed to start amp stop the driver frequently via direct switching power on or off Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Make sure the drive is in a non output status
109. d 1 b Method 2 Screwdriver Fig 3 5 Open cover Mount cover On the completion of wiring insert the buckle at higher part of the cover into the grooves at middle housing as indicated by number 1 in Fig 3 6 then push in the lower part of the cover as indicated by 2 When a click sound heard it indicates clamping has been properly made Tighten the screws provided only for 11 15kW model in buckle grooves as finish a Fig 3 6 Mount cover gt Mount cover Use the mounting method as stated in Section 3 3 1 ATTENTION Be sure to remove the keypad before opening the cover and mount the cover before mounting the keypad 21 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 3 3 Open amp Mount Covers of GK600 4T18 5G 22L GK600 4T90G 110L Remove Keypad Use the remove method as stated in Section 3 3 1 Open Cover Loosen the two captive cover screws at lower part of the cover as indicated by number 1 as shown in Fig 3 7 then pull the cover out and up as indicated by number 2 and 3 Mount Cover On the completion of all wiring align the cover into the grooves as indicated by number 1 as shown in Fig 3 7 push the cover in as indicated by number 2 tighten the two captive cover screws as f
110. d three wire control about Forward FWD and reverse REV In case of three wire control is enabled three wire control terminal is activated For details refer to C0 19 FWD REV terminal control mode 6 Running suspended When running suspended terminal is enabled during the running the drive will block the output and perform zero frequency running Once running suspended terminal becomes disabled the drive restores the running 7 External stop No matter which type of b1 00 is set to the drive will stop by enabled external stop terminal in the manner of stop mode 8 Emergency stop When emergency shutdown is enabled the drive will stop in accordance with Decel time set by b2 09 Please set b2 09 to an appropriate value so as to minimize the Decel time for emergency stop 9 Stop command DC brake The drive performs ramp down stop when stop command DC brake terminal is enabled It will perform DC brake when output frequency attains brake starting frequency Brake starting frequency and brake current are set by b1 14 and b1 15 Brake time is determined by the maximum of b1 16 and the lasting time of this terminal 10 DC brake stop The drive performs ramp to stop DC brake same as b1 13 is set to 2 when DC brake stop is enabled in the manner set by b1 14 b1 15 and b1 16 11 Coast to stop When coast to stop terminal is enabled the drive will immediately cut off its output and the motor will coast to sto
111. dentification Set preset frequency bO 02 Press RUN key to run Press STOP key to stop Fig 4 17 Flow chart of initial power up for asynchronous motor 62 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 parameter groups are listed below sae eae A1 user defined displayed and parameter management parameters C DUNS Group C input and output terminals C4 automatic correction of P77 P163 analog input dO parameters of motor 1 P78 P165 motor 1 Group d motor and control motor 1 parameters d3 parameters of motor 2 P81 P179 motor 2 motor 2 Group E enhancement EO enhancement function P84 P183 function and protection E1 protection parameters P86 P187 parameters FO process PID P87 P191 F1 multi step frequency P89 P197 Group F application F2 simple PLC P90 P200 length count parameters parameters Group L keys and display of keypad Ut faultrecord P100 P222 63 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual ATTENTION Change attribute A means the value of this parameter can be modified in stop and running status of drive X means the value of this parameter can not be modified when drive is running means this parameter is a measured value that cannot be modified Factory default value The value when restored to factory default Neither measured parameter value nor recorded value will be restored Scope the scope of setting and
112. e 0 1 By 0 Type G applicable to constant torque load 1 Type L applicable to light duty load ower supply type of the Factory default AO 07 i A Range 0 1 z 0 AC input Apply AC power supply to the drive through R S and T 1 DC input Set this parameter to 1 when applying DC power supply via 1and to the drive selection of motor Factory default A0 08 Range 0 1 5 1 motor 2 0 Motor 1 Select the current loaded motor as motor 1 Set the parameters of motor 1 in parameter groups d0 d2 1 Motor 2 Select the current loaded motor as motor 2 Set the parameters of motor 1 in parameter 1 105 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual groups d3 d5 The current loaded motor can also be selected through digital input terminal motor 1 2 switchover as shown in Table 6 1 Table 6 1 Motor 1 2 switchover AO 08 Motor selection terminal O o o o oo ow l Factory default A0 09 Motor control technique Range 00 22 00 Unit s place control technique of motor 1 0 V f control Constant Volt Hertz ratio control Applicable to such cases in which the performance requirement to the drive is not rigorous or using one drive to drive several motors or it is difficult to identify motor parameters correctly etc When motor 1 under V f control is selected need to set related parameters group d1 well Sensor less vector control 1 This helps achieve high performance control wit
113. e binary numbers of each bit and then convert the binary numbers into a hexadecimal number See Table 4 6 the corresponding relation between binary numbers and a hexadecimal number Table 4 6 Corresponding relation between binary and hexadecimal Binary numbers Hexadecimal BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BITO LED bit display value Set the value in the unit s place As shown in Fig 4 14 setting frequency and bus voltage are respectively determined by BITO and BIT1 in unit s place of L1 02 If BITO 1 setting frequency would be displayed The bits that correspond to the parameters which are not required to display shall be set to O Therefore the value in unit s place should be 0011 corresponding to 3 in a hexadecimal number Set the unit s place to 3 Set the value in decade As shown in Fig 4 14 since it is required to display AI1 the binary set value of decade is 0001 corresponding to 1 in a hexadecimal number Thus bit of decade shall be set to 1 59 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual Set the value in hundreds place As shown in Fig 4 14 the parameter required to display does not involve hundreds place so the hundreds place shall be set to zero Set thousand place As shown in Fig 4 14 since required to display running linear speed and setting linear speed the binary set value of thousand place shall be 0011 that corresponds to 3 in a hexadecimal number To sum up L1 02 should be set to 30
114. e latest fault occurred U1 06 Status of input terminal when the 0 FFFF 0000 latest fault occurred U1 07 Status of output terminal when the 0 FFFF 0000 latest fault occurred U1 08 Cumulative running time when the 0h 65535h Oh latest fault occurred U1 09 Code of previous fault Same as U1 00 0 9 Ui Un Trequency when previsti aot 00Ne 0 00Hz O fault occurred Ut 14 Output current when previous fault 0 0A 6553 5A occurred U1 12 Bus voltage when previous fault 0V 10000V occurred U1 13 Ld bridge temperature when 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 6 previous fault occurred Ut 14 inverter bridge temperature when 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 6 previous fault occurred U1 15 Platus of input terminal when 0 FFFF 0000 6 previous fault occurred U1 16 SAUS of output terminal when 0 FFFF 0000 previous fault occurred U1 17 OMANE running time when 0h 65535h Oh 6 previous fault occurred U1 18 Before previous fault code Same as U1 00 0 lo diag en 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 0 00Hz O before previous fault occurred ise M PULpunem WIR 0 0A 6553 5A 00A before previous fault occurred U1 21 Bus voltage when before previous 0V 4000V ov fault occurred 102 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory Paramete D t S esignation cope default Attr Reclifi U1 22 ectifier priage temperature when 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 before previous fault occurred U1 23 nverter pidge temperature when 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 before previous fau
115. e will start to run after power up as long as ON of run command terminal detected Make sure of the safety of personnel and equipment before this setting Function of terminal EX C0 07 sm Oomersion Bert Range 0 99 Factory default 0 Functi f terminal AI1 Digital C0 08 ed dE Digig Range 0 99 Factory default 0 enabled Functi f terminal Al2 Digital c0 09 piu is Digita Range 0 99 Factory default 0 enabled Function of terminal EAI Digital i l C0 10 enabled or IS exque ose Range 0 99 Factory default 0 Analog input terminals Al1 Al2 and EAI can also be used as digital input terminals set by C0 08 CO0 10 When AI1 AI2 and EAI are used as analog input C0 08 CO0 10 shall be set to 0 Parameter setting of digital input is as shown in Table 6 6 Table 6 6 Digital input functions E R d switched t JOG reverse un command switched to keypad control Run command switched to Running forward FWD terminal control Frequency command pattern shift Master frequency command Three wire control Running suspended switched to digital setting b0 02 EN Run command switched to 4 Running reverse REV 29 DM communication control m 135 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Auxiliary frequency command T7 External stop 32 switched to digital setting b0 04 Emergency stop PID adjustment direction pg Stop command DC brake PID paused DC brake stop PID integration paused Coast to stop PID
116. ection 11 x 0 Integral continued when frequency attains upper lower frequency 1 Integral stopped when frequency attains upper lower limit LN EET ENS F0 04 l x adjustment 1 Negative adjustment F0 05 Filtering time of PID setting _ 0 00s 60 00s F0 06 Filtering time of PID feedback __ 0 00s 60 00s F0 07 Filtering time of PID output__ 0 00s 60 00s F0 08 Proportional gainkp1__ _ 0 0 100 0 F0 09 Integration time Tit 0 0s 100 0s FO0 10 Differential time Td 0 05 100 0s F0 11 Proportional gain Kp2 0 0 100 0 F0 12 ntegration time Ti2 0 0s 100 0s F0 13 Differential time Td2 0 0s 100 0s 0 No switch determined by parameters Kp1 Ti1 and Td1 FO 14 PID parameter switch 1 Auto switch on the basis of input x offset 2 Switched by terminal FO 15 nput offset under PID auto switch 0 0 100 0 20 0 FO 16 X Sampling period T 0 001s 50 000s 0 002s F0 17 PID offset limit 0 0 100 0 F0 19 __ PID initial value 0 0 100 0 x F0 20 _ Holding time of PID initial value 0 05 3600 0s F0 21 _ PID feedback loss detection value _ 0 0 100 0 F0 22 _ PID feedback loss detection time _ 0 0s 30 0s F0 18 PID differential limit 0 0 100 0 88 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory Attr Parameter Designation Scope derart Maximum frequency if it is opposite to command running direction F0 24 F1 00 F1 01 PID computation option Group F1 Freq
117. ection enabled for output phase loss 2 Protection enabled for input phase loss protection disabled for output phase loss 3 Protection enabled for input phase loss protection enabled for output phase loss ATTENTION Please set protection action with caution since inappropriate setting may extend the fault 189 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Fault memory after power E1 08 Range 0 1 Factory default 0 Determine whether or not the previous fault code is to be memorized and displayed upon the power up of the drive after power loss 0 Not memorized after power loss 1 Memorized after power loss ATTENTION Undervoltage fault LoU is not memorized after power loss E1 09 Times of automatic reset Range 0 20 Factory default 0 Factory default E1 10 Interval of automatic reset Range 2 0s 20 0s Dae When a fault occurs during the running the drive will run at OHz with the time set by E1 10 and then the fault will be reset and the drive continues to run Times of automatic reset is set by E1 09 Automatic reset is prohibited and fault protection shall be executed immediately when E1 09 is set to 0 ATTENTION 1 Automatic fault reset is not performed at the following types of faults Module protection FAL Parameter identification failed tUN Current detection abnormal CtC Ground short circuit protection at output side GdP Converter module overload protection oL3 Expansion board
118. efault 2 0 kHz Unit s place carrier frequency adjusted with temperature 0 Automatic adjustment 1 No adjustment Decade PWM modulation mode 0 Five segment and seven segment automatic switchover 1 Five segment mode 2 Seven segment mode Hundreds place over modulation PWM optimization Thousands place adusted with freq Unit s place command when consecutive running time attained 0 Continue to run 1 Stop and fault alarm Decade command when Command when running time E0 02 accumulative running time attained attained 0 Continue to run 1 Stop and fault alarm Hundreds place unit of running time 0 Second 1 Hour E0 03 Consecutive running time 0 0s h 6000 0s h O0s h E0 04 Accumulative running time setting 0 0s h 6000 0s h O0s h 0 Disabled E0 05 Contracting brake control 1 Enabled toos Pontactin brake release 0 00Hz 10 00Hz 2 50Hz frequency E0 07 Contracting brake release current 0 0 200 0 120 0 E0 08 Accel delay time after contracting 0 0s 10 0s re brake release E0 09 Contracting brake frequency 0 00Hz 10 00Hz 2 00H tracti k E0 10 Contracting brake suction waiting 0 0s 10 0s time E0 11 me porto tm brake suction holding 0 0s 10 0s 85 N C o Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory A Parameter Designation Scope default Group E1 Protection Parameters O Prohibited E1 00 Overvoltage stall TA oed E1 01 J Overvoltage stall protection voltage 1
119. elow GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring ATTENTION Remove dust covers when mounting a drive GK600 4T15G 18 5LB or below If a number of drives are mounted in one cabinet parallel side by side mounting is recommended E sss il TI E MU WM Ventilation A A A clearance Fig 3 2 Minimum mounting clearances of GK600 4T18 5G 22L and above ATTENTION When mounting a drive GK600 4T18 5G 22L or above the minimum mounting clearances as set forth in Table 3 1 should be assured In case a number of drives are mounted in one cabinet parallel side by side mounting is recommended Table 3 1 Requirement of minimum mounting clearances Mounting clearances mm ssl u c GK600 AT45G 55L GK600 4T400G 450L Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 3 Remove amp Mount Keypad and Cover 3 3 1 Remove and Mount Keypad gt Remove keypad Press the buckle of keypad as indicated by number 1 in Fig 3 3 then pull the keypad out to release as indicated by 2 Mount keypad Slightly slant the keypad in the direction as indicated by number 1 in Fig 3 4 and align it to clamping port at lower part of keypad bracket then press it in as indicated by 2 When a click
120. ement gt When peripheral equipment and drive share the power supply of one system noise from drive may be transmitted to other equipment in this system via power lines and result in misoperation and or faults In such a case the following measures could be taken 1 Mount input noise filter at input terminal of the drive 2 Mount power supply filter at power input terminal of affected equipment 3 Use isolation transformer to isolate the noise transmission path between other equipment and the drive gt As the wiring of peripheral equipment and drive constitutes a circuit the unavoidable earthing leakage current of inverter will cause equipment misoperation and or faults Disconnect the grounding connection of equipment may avoid this misoperation and or faults gt Sensitive equipment and signal lines shall be mounted as far away from drive as possible ix Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual gt Signal lines should be provided with shielded layer and reliably grounded Alternatively signal cable could be put into metallic conduits between which the distance shall be no less than 20cm and shall be kept as far away from drive and its peripheral devices cables as possible Never make signal lines in parallel with power lines or bundle them up gt Signal lines must orthogonally cross power lines if this cross inevitable Motor cables shall be placed in thick protective screen like more than 2mm thick pipelines or bu
121. en current passes through 1 Negative logic ON when no current passes through Decade X2 same as X1 Hundreds place X3 same as X1 Thousands place X4 same as X1 Digital input terminal Factory default C0 15 ODE Range 000 414 Hn enabled status setting 2 Unit s place X5 0 Positive logic ON when current passes through 1 Negative logic ON when no current passes through Decade X6 same as X5 Hundreds place EX on IO expansion board same as X5 Digital input terminal Factory default C0 16 AL Range 000 414 Hs enabled status setting 3 This parameter sets the enabled condition of Al1 AI2 and EAI as digital input terminal need to be defined by C0 08 CO0 10 Unit s place AI1 0 Positive logic 5V ON 5V OFF 1 Negative logic 5V OFF gt 5V ON 143 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Decade Al2 same as Al1 Hundreds place EAI on IO expansion board same as Al1 Terminal UP DOWN frequenc Factory default Sone eee d Range 000 414 b adjustment treatment 0000 Unit s place action when stop 0 Clear Terminal UP DOWN frequency adjustment value is cleared when the drive stops 1 Holding Terminal UP DOWN frequency adjustment value is maintained when the drive stops Decade action on power loss 0 Clear Terminal UP DOWN frequency adjustment value is cleared in case of power loss 1 Holding Terminal UP DOWN frequency adju
122. ent harmonic Under seven segment mode it has relatively higher temperature rise but lower output current harmonic Under SVC pattern PWM is seven segment mode Hundreds place over modulation adjustment 0 Disabled Enabled At low grid voltage or long term heavy duty operation over modulation can improve the voltage utilization and enhance the maximum voltage output capacity of the drive This parameter takes effect only for V f control while over modulation is enabled all the time under SVC pattern Thousands place PWM carrier frequency adjusted with frequency 0 Adjusted 1 No adjustment 184 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Command when runnin Fact default E0 02 Range 000 111 dE time attained 000 Units place command when consecutive running time attained 0 Continue to run When consecutive running time of the drive attains the set value of E0 03 the drive will continue to run 1 Stop and fault alarm When consecutive running time of the drive attains the set value of E0 03 the drive will display fault code to2 and coast to stop Digital output terminal consecutive running time attained will output ON When EO0 03 is set to 0 this parameter value is enabled Decade command when accumulative running time reached 0 Continue to run When accumulative running time of the drive attains the set value of EO 04 the drive will continue to run Stop and faul
123. entification please input the parameters manually by referring to parameters of like motors If motor power rating d0 01 is changed d0 02 d0 14 will be automatically restored to default setting of the standard motor Parameter identification of d0 22 Range 0 2 Factory default 0 motor 1 Parameters for controlling the motor performance are automatically obtained through parameter identification and the result will be automatically saved upon the completion of identification Be sure to correctly input motor 1 parameters d0 01 d0 06 before parameter identification 0 No action 1 Static identification Static identification applies to the cases where rotating identification cannot be favorably performed due to the fact that it is impossible to disengage the motor from its load After d0 22 is set to 1 and confirmed press the key RUN to start static identification d0 22 will be restored to 0 upon the successful completion of identification In this way parameters d0 07 d0 09 are obtained 2 Rotating identification To perform rotation identification it is essential to disengage the motor from its load Identification is prohibited when motor is loaded After d0 22 is set to 2 and confirmed press RUN to perform static identification upon the completion of which the motor would accelerate to a fixed frequency in the set ramp up time maintaining a period of time and then stop by ramp down according to the set ramp down time In
124. erminal s function are not set in C1 01 but in C3 02 Output terminal function selections are as follows Table 6 14 Setting Corresponding function Setting Corresponding function Nw No output Drive thermal alarm Drive undervoltage Zero current detection Drive running preparation completed Drive in OHz running output at stop Running direction Frequency attained Upper limit frequency attained 147 Drive in OHZ running no output at Motor 1 2 indication Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual o tovertesery ated 26 sie nog ne aad Torque limited 30 PLC step completed Fault output P PLC cycle completed Wobble frequency attains to upper or Alarm output lower limit frequency E No nen Output terminal is disabled and there is no output Drive undervoltage When DC bus voltage is lower than the level of undervoltage output ON signal and LED keypad displays LoU 2 Drive running preparation completed The output of ON signal indicates that the drive is free of fault the bus voltage is normal and the running prohibition terminal is disabled Under this circumstance run command is acceptable 3 Drive is running The output is ON when the drive is running and output is OFF when drive stopped 4 Drive in OHz running no output at stop When be running at OHz this corresponding terminal outputs ON signal No ON signal will be output at stop 5 Drive in OHz running
125. es oh oe UI Penge DI S0 ONE Factory default 0 0 C when previous fault occurred Status of input terminal when Diese ae ee Range 0000 FFFF Factory default 0000 previous fault occurred Status of output terminal mien a a Range 0000 FFFF Factory default 0000 when previous fault occurred C lati ing ti U1 17 dida i MUN Range Oh 65535h Factory default Oh when previous fault occurred Check the information of previous fault See Chapter 7 for details of fault codes U1 18 Before previous fault code Range 0 45 Factory default 0 Running frequency when before previous fault Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz occurred Factory default 0 00Hz Output current when before previous fault Range 0 0A 6553 5A Factory default 0 0A occurred Bus voltage when before previous fault Range 0V 10000V Factory default OV occurred 223 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Rectifier bridge temperature when before previous fault 40 0 C 100 0 C Factory default 0 0 C occurred Inverter bridge temperature when before previous fault 40 0 C 100 0 C Factory default 0 0 C occurred Status of input terminal when before previous fault 0000 FFFF Factory default 0000 occurred Status of output terminal when before previous fault 0000 FFFF Factory default 0000 occurred Cumulative running time when before previous fault Range Oh 65535h Factory default Oh occurred Check the information of before pre
126. ess 8 to save the value 50 00 of b0 09 Then the keypad will automatically switch to display the next function code b0 10 12 Press S to exit parameter edit status Flow chart is shown below 50 00 CENT A0 00 ES A0 00 CA b0 00 600 00 B 600 00 ES b0 09 CAD b0 00 000 00 D gt 000 00 lt gt 050 00 CENT b0 10 CESC Escape modification Esc Fig 4 12 Flow chart of upper limit frequency modification Example 2 user parameter initialization 1 In non parameter edit status press TP to display current parameter AO 00 2 Press A three times to change 0 in the rightmost bit of AO 00 to 3 3 Press VEE to display parameter value 0 of AO 03 4 Press once to change 0 to 2 or 3 2 motor parameter excluded 3 means motor parameter included 5 Press 88 to save the value of A0 03 Then keypad will automatically display parameter AO 00 6 Press SE to escape parameter edit status Flow chart is shown below Fig 4 13 Flow chart of user parameter initialization 58 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions Example 3 setting method of hexadecimal parameter Take L1 02 LED STOP display parameter for example if LED keypad is required to display setting frequency bus voltage Al1 running linear speed and setting linear speed Since all bits are independent of each other the unit s place decade hundreds place and thousands place should be set separately Determine th
127. etermined by auxiliary frequency command or master amp auxiliary computation result through digital input terminal frequency command switchover When terminal frequency command switchover is invalid command frequency is determined by b0 03 auxiliary frequency command source When terminal frequency command switchover is valid command frequency is determined by master amp auxiliary computation result The master amp auxiliary computation relation is determined by b0 07 Master frequenc Factory default command source 0 0 Digital setting 60 02 V adjustment on keypad When the drive is powered up the value of b0 02 is taken as the master frequency command which can be adjusted through V keys on keypad no matter the drive is running or in stop 111 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual ATTENTION Frequency adjustment via V on keypad can be cleared through terminal UP DOWN including ALV key adjustment clear Refer to CO 01 C0 10 for details Digital setting b0 02 terminal UP DOWN adjustment When the drive is powered up the value of b0 02 is taken as the master frequency command This frequency can be adjusted via terminal UP and terminal DOWN no matter the drive is running or in stop When this parameter value is selected following parameter setting should be performed 1 Set the two digital input terminals to terminal UP and terminal DOWN respectively
128. ets the display hide of parameters 0 Display all parameters A1 20 A1 21 parameter display hide is valid 1 Only display parameters A0 00 and AO 01 2 Only display A0 00 AO 01 and user defined parameters A1 00 A1 19 3 Only display A0 00 A0 01 and the parameters different with factory default Factory default A0 02 Parameter protection Range 0 1 0 0 All parameter programming allowed 1 Only AO 00 and this parameter programming allowed When this parameter is set to 1 all parameters other than AO 00 and AO 02 are not allowed to modify Set A0 02 to 0 before the modification of other parameters 104 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Factory default A0 03 Parameter initialization 0 No operation 1 Clear fault record When this parameter is set to 1 all fault record of Group U1 will be cleared 2 Restore all parameters to factory default excluding motor parameters 3 Restore all parameters to factory default including motor parameters 4 Restore all parameters to backup parameters Factory default A0 04 Parameter backup Range 0 1 r 1 Backup all parameters A0 05 Copy of parameter Range 0 3 0 No operation Factory default 0 No operation 1 Upload all parameters other than Group U to keypad 2 Download all parameters of keypad other than d0 01 d0 18 and d3 01 d3 18 to drive 3 Download all parameters of keypad to drive Factory default A0 06 Type of drive Rang
129. ets the running time of step 12 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 27 Setting of step 13 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 28 Running time of step 13 Range 0 0 6000 0s min aloe Sets the running time of segment 13 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 29 Setting of step 14 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 14 F1 16 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 208 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters LV Factory default F2 30 Running time of step 14 Range 0 0 6000 0s min os Sets the running time of step 14 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 31 Setting of step 15 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 15 F1 17 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 32 Running time of step 15 Range 0 0 6000 0s min os Sets the running time for step 15 of simple PL
130. f inflection point A of curve 2 Range 100 0 100 0 Range 110 0 input of inflection point B of curve 2 Range 100 0 100 0 Factory default 0 0 Factory default 0 0 Factory default 0 0 Factory default 0 0 minimum input of curve 2 Description of input value of curve 2 Voltage input 1 With regard to Al1 and the EAI on expansion board 0 corresponds to OV or OmA while 100 corresponds to 10V or 20mA 2 Regarding to Al2 100 corresponds to 10V while 100 corresponds to 10V Curve 2 is defined by C2 05 C2 12 The input of curve 2 and the definition of corresponding set value is the same as Al1 The difference is that curve 1 is a straight line while curve 2 is a broken line with two inflection points Diagram of curve 2 is shown as below Corresponding set value Corresponding set value A Set value that corresponds to maximum input of curve 2 7 C2 06 Set value corresponds to point B input C2 10 Set value that corresponds to maximum input of curve 2 C2 06 Set value corresponds to point B input C2 10 Set value corresponds to point A input C2 08 Set value corresponds to point A input C2 08 Al analog Maximum input of curve 2 C2 05 d NN Set value that corresponds to minimum input of curve 2 Al analog C2 12 Maximum input of curve 2 C2 05 Set value that corresponds to minimum input of curve 2 C2 12
131. f initial t of Decel p2 47 ne OF nal segment ot zece 000s 60 00s S curve A 0 20s n S curve Time of last t of Decel b2 18 00S 60 008 S curve A 0 20s n S curve Proportion of initial t of b2 19 PorWon er inmar segment ot 10 0 100 0 S curve B 20 096 Accel S curve Proportion of last t of Accel b2 20 Poruon er last segment ot Acce 9 0 100 0 S curve B 20 096 nm S curve Proportion of initial t of BO oe ee ee ee 0 0 100 0 S curve B 20 0 Decel S curve Proportion of last t of Decel b2 22 oe ast segment ot ece 19 0 100 0 S curve B 20 0 Group C Input and Output Terminals Group CO Digital Input 0 Trigger edge detected ON detected ON detected Enabled condition of run command terminals when power up No function CO 01 Function of terminal X1 JOG forward ES JOG reverse C0 02 Function of terminal X2 Running forward FWD x External stop Emergency stop Stop command DC brake C0 04 Function of terminal X4 C0 05 Function of terminal X5 x x x x x 1 0 1 2 3 Funconotteminalxs Running reverse REV C0 03 Function of terminal X3 5 Three wire control 6 Running suspended T 8 9 70 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Fact ma 10 DC brake stop C0 06 Function of terminal X6 DI 11 Coast to stop F nal EX 12 Terminal UP C0 07 id s aiiis 13 Terminal DOWN SOR EXPANSION DOA 14 UP DOWN including A V key C0 08 Function of terminal Al1 Digi
132. fault H0 03 Time out detection Range 0 0s 1000 0s os This parameter sets communication error detection time When it s set to 0 no communication error will be reported TUR Factory default HO 04 Communication time delay Range Oms 1000ms rre Sets response time delay of this drive to the master HO0 05 Master Slave option Range 0 2 Factory default 0 0 PC controls the drive PC as master controls the drive This supports all communication protocols 1 As master This drive as master sends current running frequency data through RS 485 port Data cannot be received but sent and the sending data is only running frequency 2 As slave 214 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Put the received data into bO 02 digital setting of master frequency or FO 01 PID digital setting through communication b0 02 F0 01 is selected by parameter HO 06 Other communication data addresses are not supported As slave this drive can only receive the data H0 06 Parameter store address Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 b0 02 1 F0 01 Enabled when HO 05 is set to 2 This parameter sets the store address of received data when it works as slave Proportional factor of received Factory default H0 07 5 Range 0 0 100 0 i frequency 100 0 Enabled when HO 05 is set to 2 Received data is multiplied by HO 07 and then put the result into the address set by HO 06 This parameter setting is very useful when a maste
133. fault 20 0 P rti f last t b2 20 PA E pU Range 0 096 100 096 Factory default 20 0 Proportion of initial b2 21 Sement Sas cem Range 0 096 100 096 Factory default 20 0 P rti f last t b2 22 pee Siti xu Range 0 096 100 096 Factory default 20 096 These four parameters are enabled when b2 12 is set to 3 ATTENTION The sum of set values of b2 19 and b2 20 should not exceed 100 096 The same to b2 21 and b2 22 Group C Input and Output Terminals Group CO Digital Input Enabled condition of run command terminals when Range 0 1 Factory default 0 power up This parameter is only for digital terminals with parameter value 1 4 forward reverse jog and forward reverse running and also is only for initial running after power up 0 Trigger edge detected ON detected When run command is controlled by terminals the drive will start to run when it detects that the terminal jumps from OFF to ON and is kept ON after power up If run command terminal is in ON state before power up the drive will not run after power up Under this circumstance only when the ON state is shifted to OFF and then ON again and maintain ON the drive will start running 1 ON detected When run command is controlled by terminals the drive will start to run when detecting the command terminal at ON state after power up 134 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ATTENTION When 1 ON detected selected the driv
134. formed close to factory default parameter Factory default d2 07 ASR input filtering time Range 0 0ms 500 0ms Sets the input filtering time of ASR No need to modify its default setting if there is no special requirement Factory default d2 08 ASR output filtering time Range 0 0ms 500 0ms Sets the output filtering time of ASR No need to modify its default setting if there is no special requirement ACR proportion coefficient MUNERE sitae ne ACR integration coefficient Factory default These two parameters determine the characteristics of automatic current regulator ACR under SVC pattern Increment of proportion coefficient and or integration coefficient can shorten torque response time Reduction of proportion coefficient an or integration coefficient can increase the stability of the system Inappropriate setting may bring about system oscillation Factory default is not needed to be changed in most cases 177 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual We Factory default d2 11 Pre excitation time Range 0 000s 5 000s 0 2008 Applies to asynchronous motor To attain quick start it is necessary to perform pre excitation before the running of motor and the pre excitation time is set by this parameter Properly establish stable flux prior and then ramp up quickly The set value of 0 000s means no pre excitation and ramp up at the moment of the receipt of run command Pre excitation
135. frame end can be configured and defined by user 2 In ASCII mode all data bytes other than frame header and end are sent in the form of ASCII code high 4 bit byte and low 4 bit byte are sent successively 3 In ASCII mode the data is 7 bit long For A F their uppercase ASCII codes are used 4 Data is subjected to LRC check which covers the information portion from slave address to data 5 Check sum is equal to the complement of sum of characters that participate in data check abort the feed bit In ASCII mode data frame format is as follows ASCII data frame format Modbus message E p Start 0 x Slave Parameter End OxD 3A address Data Check OxA Examples of Modbus data frame in ASCII mode are as follows The writing of 4000 OxFAO into internal register 002 of 1 slave is shown in the table below LRC check complement of 01 06 00 02 0x0F 0xA0O 0x48 Appendix Table 3 Hea Paramet LRC Hee Adress peram Register address Write in content End check eeel Le e pper eh ee Different response delays can be set for drive through parameters so as to adapt to specific application requirements of various master stations in RTU mode the actual response delay is not less than 3 5 characters while in ASCII mode the actual response delay shall not be less than 1ms 240 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol 5 Protocol Function The uppermost function of Modbus is to read and
136. frequency b1 06 keeping a period of time as specified by b1 07 and then Accelerate to command frequency 2 Start based on speed search Search the actual speed of motor that is rotating and perform smooth start from the searched speed This start method is applicable to restart on momentary power loss the start of fan which is still rotating etc To assure the accuracy of speed search please correctly set motor parameters and b1 10 b1 12 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default b1 06 Start frequency eO 0 001 Holding time of start Factory default b1 07 Mb il Range 0 0s 3600 0s s frequency 0 0s Start frequency is initial output frequency of drive start from stop status Start frequency holding time is the continuous running time with start frequency After this holding time the drive will Accelerate to command frequency Usually appropriate start frequency and holding time assure the starting torque of heavy duty load ATTENTION Provided that command frequency is lower than start frequency drive output frequency is O Hz Start frequency also works on the transition of forward and reverse but starting frequency holding time is disabled during transition between forward and reverse Accel time of Group b2 excludes holding time of start frequency DC braking current Factory default b1 08 Range 0 0 100 0 i when start 0 096 DC braking ti hen Factory default b1 09 ird Range 0 00s 30 00s y start 0 00s When t
137. frequency with the memorized state at latest stop Pre frequency of wobble frequency F3 02 is enabled at restart Memory disabled When the drive is started it restarts wobble frequency running Run at pre frequency of wobble frequency F3 02 maintain this frequency for pre frequency holding time F3 03 and then automatically gets into wobble frequency control Thousands place wobble frequency memorized on power loss 0 Memory enabled Automatically save the wobble frequency state on power loss This function takes effect only under wobble frequency running 1 Memory disabled Drive clears wobble frequency status on power loss Factory default F3 02 Pre wobble frequency Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 0 00Hz Pre wobble frequenc Factory default F3 03 i de c Range 0 0s 3600 0s E holding time 0 0s During the running of wobble frequency F3 02 is the running frequency before the drive begins to run at wobble frequency while F3 03 is the holding time of pre wobble frequency When F3 03 is set to 0 pre frequency is disabled Wobble frequenc Factory default F3 04 i undi Range 0 0 50 0 amplitude 0 0 The percentage is relative to center frequency or maximum frequency and determined by the decade of F3 01 Center frequency is the command frequency set by parameters of Group bO Running frequency of wobble frequency is not only subject to this amplitude but is also restricted by upper limit and lower limit of frequency
138. fset between setting and feedback is less than this set value it is determined 195 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual by Kp1 Ti1 and Td1 When the offset between setting and feedback is bigger than this set value it is determined by Kp2 Ti2 and Td2 Factory default F0 16 Sampling period T Range 0 001s 50 000s OST Sampling period aims at feedback PID controller performs the sampling and compute once in each sampling period The longer the sampling period T is the slower the response time will be NC Factory default F0 17 PID offset limit Range 0 0 100 0 MAS 0 If the offset between PID feedback and setting is more than this set value PID regulator will implement regulation If the offset between PID feedback and setting is less than this set value PID will stop the regulation and the PID controller output will be kept unchanged This function can improve the stability of PID performance ENTER Factory default F0 18 PID differential limit Range 0 096 100 096 0 5 o Sets differential output limit of PID control qu Factory default F0 19 PID initial value Range 0 096 100 096 0 096 Holding ti f PID initial Factory default ESPUMA Grete EAS Range 0 0s 3600 0s 5l value 0 0s PID does not make adjustment when the drive starts its running but outputs the value set by F0 19 and maintains the holding time set by F0 20 then starts PID adjustment When FO 20 is set to O PID i
139. ge to non volatile storage non volatile storage Drive control parameters are used for start stop and running frequency setting By detecting drive status parameters running status and running mode can be obtained Drive control parameters and status parameters are shown in appendix table 22 Appendix Table 22 Control parameters Save at power Register address Parameter name loss 0x6200 Control command word 0x6201 Master frequency command setting 0x6202 Auxiliary frequency command setting 0x6203 Master frequency command 0x6204 Auxiliary frequency command 249 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Save at power Register address Parameter name loss PID feedback percentage 0 100 096 Setting of slave frequency setting proportion 0 100 096 0x6212 Virtual terminal communication setting 0x6213 Accel time 1 0x6214 Decel time 1 Appendix Table 23 Status parameters 0x6211 High bit words of actual length 250 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol 0x6313 Alt unit V Drive control bits are defined as below table 24 Appendix Table 24 Control bits Control bit Function description Run command ee eer O e drive disabled p BITO Run command Start the drive enabled 251 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Control bit Function description when run command Forward 0 Jog disabled enabled EN HEN enabled Reset
140. gh the combination of multi step frequency terminals 1 4 of digital input Multi step frequency 2 15 are only digital setting while a number of setting sources can be selected for multi step frequency 0 1 Parameter value of F1 00 determines command source of step O Frequenc command F1 01 S i Range 0 8 Factory default 0 source of multi step 1 0 Digital setting F1 03 1 Digital setting b0 04 keypad V adjustment 2 Digital setting b0 04 terminal UP DOWN adjustment 5 EAI on IO expansion card 6 X6 DI pulse input 7 Process PID output 8 Communication At most 16 step of frequency can be set through the combination of multi step frequency terminals 1 4 of digital input Multi step frequency 2 15 are only digital setting while a number of setting sources can be selected for multi step frequency 0 1 Parameter value of F1 01 197 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual determines command source of step 1 Lower limit frequency upper F1 02 Multi step frequency 0 Factory default limit frequency 0 00Hz Lower limit frequency upper F1 03 Multi step frequency 1 Factory default limit frequency 0 00 Hz Lower limit frequency upper F1 04 Multi step frequency 2 Factory default limit frequency 0 00 Hz ii m a m ke sa in o m mi n i hs uL won At most 16 steps of multi step frequency can be set by different status combinations of multi step frequency term
141. gnals cables should be as short as possible shielded and their shielded layers should be properly grounded close to the side of drive The cables should not exceed 20m Control cables shall be kept no less than 20cm away from main circuit and strong current 37 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual lines e g power lines motor lines relay lines and contactor lines and should not be arranged in parallel with strong current lines In case it is inevitable to intersect strong current line vertical wiring is recommended to avoid drive faults as a result of noise Where analog input amp output signals are severely interfered the side of analog signal source should be provided with filter capacitor or ferrite core 3 9 4 Instructions of Digital Input Output Terminals Digital input amp output signals cables should be as short as possible shielded and their shielded layers should be properly grounded close to the side of drive The cables should not exceed 20m When active drive is selected take necessary filtering measures against power crosstalk for which dry contact control is recommended Control cables shall be kept no less than 20cm away from main circuit and strong current lines e g power lines motor lines relay lines and contactor lines and should not be arranged in parallel with strong current lines In case it is inevitable to intersect strong current line vertical wiring is recommended to avoid drive fau
142. he motor is started by the method DC braking then start it is essential to set the these two parameters 10096 corresponds to rated current of drive If braking time is set to 0 0s DC braking when start shall be disabled Factory default b1 10 Speed search current Range 0 200 0 100 0 100 corresponds to rated current of the drive When output current of drive is less than this parameter value it will be deemed that the output frequency of drive has been kept in step with motor speed and the search action finished 125 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory default b1 11 Sped search Decel time Range 0 1s 20 0s 2 This parameter sets the output frequency Decel time of speed search action This time means the time required for Decel from maximum frequency to O The shorter the speed search Decel time is the faster the search will be However excessively rapid search may bring about inaccuracy of search result V f coefficient durin Factory default b1 12 g Range 20 0 100 0 5 speed search 100 096 This parameter is set to suppress the output current of speed search and improve the reliability of speed search by multiplying this value on the basis of motor V f curve b1 13 Stop method Range 0 2 Factory default 0 0 Ramp to stop Upon the receipt of stop command drive will gradually decrease output frequency according to the set Decel time and stop when frequency attains 0 1 Coa
143. hen it is closed running is reverse Xi is a digital input terminal In this case it is necessary to define the function of corresponding terminal as three wire running terminal This parameter is a 10 bit binary numeral The terminals that correspond respectively to bit9 the highest bit of binary system through bitO the lowest bit of binary system are as follows Table 6 13 Res Unit s place bitO0 bit3 X1 X4 0 Actual terminal takes effect 1 Virtual terminal takes effect Decade bit4 bit6 X5 X6 EX 0 Actual terminal takes effect 146 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters 1 Virtual terminal takes effect Hundreds place bit8 bit10 AI1 Al2 EAI 0 Actual terminal takes effect 1 Virtual terminal takes effect Virtual terminals simulate actual terminals via communication Each bit represents one terminal When selecting virtual terminal corresponding bit should be set to 1 in C0 20 Group C1 Digital Output C1 00 Y1 output function Range 0 99 Factory default 0 Y2 DO output function C1 01 i Range 0 99 Factory default 0 when used as Y2 Control panel rela Factory default C1 02 l J Range 0 99 hj output function 14 Expansion board rela Factory default C1 03 7 Y Range 0 99 5 output function 15 Define the functions of digital output terminals Y1 amp Y2 control board relay and expansion board relay When used as high speed pulse output Y2 DO t
144. hout encoder and provides strong adaptability of load Under this selection please correctly set motor parameters of Group dO and vector control parameters of Group d2 NO Sensor less vector control 2 This helps achieve high performance control without encoder This control technique is superior to sensor less vector control 1 Under this selection please correctly set motor parameters of Group dO and vector control parameters of Group d2 Decade control technique of motor 2 0 V f control Constant Volt Hertz ratio control Applicable to such cases in which the performance requirement to the drive is not rigorous or using one drive to drive several motors or it is difficult to identify motor parameters correctly etc When motor 1 under V f control is selected need to set related parameters group d4 well sensor less vector control 1 This helps achieve high performance control without encoder and provides strong adaptability of load Under this selection please correctly set motor parameters of Group d3 and vector control parameters of Group d5 106 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters 2 Sensor less vector control 2 This helps achieve high performance control without encoder This control technique is superior to sensor less vector control 1 Under this selection please correctly set motor parameters of Group d3 and vector control parameters of Group d5 ATTENTION When vector contro
145. i step frequency 3 F1 05 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 08 Running time of step 3 Range 0 0 6000 0s min Sets the running time of step 3 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 09 Setting of step 4 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 4 F 1 06 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 10 Running time of step 4 Range 0 0 6000 0s min ane Sets the running time of step 4 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 11 Setting of step 5 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 205 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual 0 Multi step frequency 5 F1 07 1 7 same as F2 01 K Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 12 Running time of step 5 Range 0 0 6000 0s min aloe Sets the running time of step 5 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 13 Setting of step 6 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 6 F 1 08 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same
146. iary frequency command Range of auxilia b0 05 Range 0 1 Factory default 0 frequency 0 Relative to maximum frequency 1 Relative to master frequency See b0 06 specification for details Coeff of auxilia Factory default b0 06 y Range 0 0 100 0 M frequency command 100 0 When b0 03 selects Al1 Al2 EAI X6 DI pulse input or process PID output as auxiliary frequency command sources b0 05 and b0 06 will determine the final output value of auxiliary frequency command When b0 05 is set to 0 relative to maximum frequency When Al1 AI2 EAI X6 DI pulse input is selected for auxiliary frequency command the frequency that corresponds to maximum value of the source should be bO0 08xb0 06 Example Select Al1 as auxiliary frequency command source set b0 03 to 3 and set Al1 to curve 1 unit s place of C2 00 is 0 as shown in Fig 6 5 In such a case the frequency that corresponds to the maximum input of curve 1 should be C2 02 x b0 08 x b0 06 117 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Corresponding set value Set value that corresponds to maximum input of curve 1 C2 02 Set value that corresponds to minimum input of curve 1 C2 04 Al analog Minimum input of Maximum curve 1 C2 03 input of curve 1 C2 01 Fig 6 5 When X6 DI pulse input is selected as auxiliary frequency command set b0 03 to 6 the frequency that corresponds to maximum DI input should be C2 25 x
147. ication of Parameters Table 6 11 Run command Stop inputs running direction Table 6 12 Running command Reverse FWD terminal controls forward running of the drive REV terminal controls reverse running and digital input terminal three wire running controls the stop Input signals of all these three terminals take effect when trigger edge is detected Fig 6 19 Three wire mode 1 SB1 is a stop button by pressing which the drive will stop 24V C PLC Three wire running terminal Xi 145 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual SB2 is a FORWARD button by pressing which forward running will be activated SB3 is a REVERSE button by pressing which reverse running will be activated Xi is a digital input terminal In this case it is necessary to define the function of corresponding terminal as three wire running terminal 3 Three wire mode 2 FWD terminal controls the running while running direction is determined by REV terminal Digital input terminal three wire running controls the stop 24V O 4 PLCOoO Three wire SB1 running terminal 9 Xi SB2 FWDo 4 Drive K REV 0 COMoO Fig 6 20 Three wire mode 2 SB1 is a stop button by pressing which the drive will stop SB2 is a RUN button by pressing which the drive will run When switch K is open running is forward while w
148. ime 4 The Accel Decel time of simple PLC running is set here not determined by digital input terminal Accel Decel time determinant 1 2 In addition Accel Decel time unit is set through thousands place of F2 00 and is independent of the setting of b2 00 Factory default F2 02 Running time of step 0 Range 0 0 6000 0s min Sets the running time for step 0 of simple PLC and the time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 03 Setting of step 1 Range 000 327 ee Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 1 F1 03 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 04 Running time of step 1 Range 0 0 6000 0s min S Sets the running time for step 1 of simple PLC and the time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 204 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Factory default F2 05 Setting of step 2 Range 000 327 E Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 2 F1 04 1 7 same as F2 01 y Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 06 Running time of step 2 Range 0 0 6000 0s min Sets the running time of step 2 The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 07 Setting of step 3 Range 0007 327 in Unit s place frequency setting 0 Mult
149. imum corresponding value DO pulse frequency 1 Center point is C3 09 2 and the corresponding parameter value is positive when frequency is higher than center point The value that corresponds to DO pulse frequency at center point is 0 DO pulse frequency C3 09 corresponds to the positive maximum value while DO pulse frequency OHz corresponds to the negative maximum value See Fig 6 37 Corresponding value of DO Maximum corresponding value DO pulse frequency C3 09 2 Maximum negative corresponding value Fig 6 37 162 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters 2 Center point is C3 09 2 and the corresponding parameter value is positive when frequency is lower than center point The value that corresponds to DO pulse frequency at center point is 0 When set to 0 DO pulse corresponds to the positive maximum value while when set to C3 09 DO pulse frequency corresponds to the negative maximum value See Fig 6 38 Corresponding value of DO Maximum corresponding value DO pulse frequency Maximum negative corresponding value Factory default C3 11 DO output filtering time Range 0 00s 10 00s AN Set the filtering time of DO high speed pulse output Filtering can change the change rate of output pulse frequency The longer the filtering time is the lower the change rate of output pulse frequency would be Group C4 Automatic Correction of Analog Input Parameter Group C4 is
150. inals 1 4 of digital input as shown in Table 6 18 198 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Table 6 18 Mul Multi st Multi st Multi ste ids B i uiis i nu i r Command frequency terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 Multi step frequency O F 1 00 OFF OFF Multi step frequency 1 F1 01 Multi step frequency 2 F1 04 La Dem 3 F1 05 EN ad 4 F1 06 EN 5 F1 07 6 F1 08 7 F1 09 8 F1 10 9 F1 11 Multi step frequency 10 F1 12 Multi step frequency 11 F1 13 Multi step frequency 12 F1 14 Multi step frequency 13 F1 15 Multi step frequency 14 F1 16 Multi step frequency 15 F1 17 O O O Z epele Z Z Z Z O Z epele Z Z 199 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Group F2 Simple PLC Simple PLC is a multi step frequency generator The drive can automatically change running frequency and direction based on running time so as to meet on site technological requirements Flow chart is shown as Fig 6 49 I b 4 T11 T12 i i i PLC step completed Pulse length 500ms I l PLC cycle completed Fig 6 49 a0 a15 are the Accel times of steps while d0 d15 are the Decel times f0 f15 are the set frequencies of steps while TO T15 are the running times Upon the completion of current step of simple PLC digital output termin
151. inish No I I l ii j 9 l if Fig 3 7 Open amp mount cover Mount Keypad Use the mounting method as stated in Section 3 3 1 ATTENTION Be sure to remove the keypad before opening the cover and mount the cover before mounting the keypad 3 3 4 Open and Mount Covers of GK600 4T110G 132L and above gt gt Remove keypad Use the removing method as stated in Section 3 3 1 Open the lower cover Loosen the two captive cover screws as shown by number 1 in Fig 3 8 left and then pull the cover out to release as indicated by number 2 in Fig 3 8 left Nm GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring gt Open the upper cover Loosen the two captive cover screws by number 3 as shown in Fig 3 8 right pull the upper cover forward for about 45 degrees in the direction as indicated by number 4 in Fig 3 8 right then push it out upwards yy yy qn TI E a A uf n 1 1a Fig 3 8 Open the upper and lower covers gt Mount the upper cover Insert the upper part of the cover into mounting groove as indicated by number 1 as shown in Fig 3 9 left close the upper cover use Phillips screwdriver to tighten the two sunk screws as indicated by number 2 gt Mount the lower cover Insert the lower cover into upper cover in the direction a
152. input will cause faults even damage to the drives This series of drives support common DC bus input Users are suggested to consult GTAKE technical personnel before use 1 2 2 Surge Protection This series of drives are furnished with surge suppressor that has certain resistance to lightning induction However users in areas with frequent occurrence of lightning need to mount an external surge suppressor in front of the drive power input side 1 2 3 Operation of Contactor As to the configuration of peripheral devices recommended by this manual it is necessary to mount a contactor between the power supply and this drive input side Such a contactor should not be used as a control device for start and stop of the drive as frequent charging amp discharging shall reduce the service life of internal electrolytic capacitors When it is necessary to mount a contactor between the drive output and the motor it should be ensured the drive is in a non output status before switch on switch off of such a contactor Failure to comply may result in drive damage 1 2 4 Output Filter Since the drive output is PWM high frequency chopping voltage mounting filter devices such as an output filter and an output AC reactor between the motor and the drive shall effectively reduce output noise avoiding interference to other surrounding equipments If the length of cable between the drive and the motor exceeds 100m an output AC reactor is recommended to use
153. ion board S1 S2 S3 485 AM AO1 ON OFF V V Fig 6 33 Output range of DO pulse frequency is 0 C3 09 maximum output pulse frequency The ranges of corresponding digital output of AO1 EAO and DO are as shown in the table 6 15 159 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Table 6 15 7 E E nu i m 9 9 16 Communication input percentage 17 0 maximum frequency compensation C3 03 AO1 offset Range 100 096 100 096 Factory default 0 096 C3 04 AQ1 gain Range 2 000 2 000 Factory default 1 000 When users need to chang AO1 measuring range or correct the error of meter it can be realized by setting of C3 03 and C3 04 When using factory default set 0 10V or 0 20mA of AO1 corresponds to 0 maximun See table 6 15 for details By expressing standard output of AO as x the adjusted AO1 output as y the gain as k and the offset as b 100 of offset corresponds to 10V or 20mA there is the equation y kx b Example oet C3 00 to 2 output frequency Standard AO1 output AO1 outputs OV when output frequency is 0 and outputs 10V when output frequency is maximum frequency If AO1 is 1 requested to output 2V when output frequency is OHz and to output 8V when output frequency is the maximum frequency There is 2 kx0 b 8 kx10 b Through these two equations we obtain k 0 6 b 2V i e 160 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parame
154. ire This equipment must be mounted in an area which is away from combustibles and heat sources Failure to comply may result in fire This equipment must in no case be mounted in the environment exposed to explosive gases Failure to comply may result in explosion Never adjust mounting bolts of this equipment especially the ones with red markers Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Handle the equipment gently and take hold of its sole plate so as to avoid foot injury or equipment damage Mount the equipment where its weight can be withstood Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personnel injury if falling happens Make sure the installation environment conforms to the requirements as stated in Section 2 4 If not de rating is necessary Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Prevent drilling residues wire ends and screws from falling into the equipment during installation Failure to comply may result in faults or equipment damage When mounted in a cabinet this equipment should be provided with appropriate heat dissipation Failure to comply may result in faults or equipment damage 1 1 3 Wiring Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the wiring Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and or equipment damage Wiring must strictly conform to this manual Failure to comply may result in personnel in
155. istors are not built in and need to be sourced additionally 27 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 5 Terminal Configuration fe Control circuit terminals e O Z PS 3 M Main circuit terminals E Li s L3 T L amp 1 Jezved amp z e vem vrz Ts Grounding terminals Fig 3 11 Terminal configuration 3 6 Main Circuit Terminals and Wiring Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives are allowed to implement wiring Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personnel injury even death Wiring should be in strict accordance with this manual otherwise hazard of electric shock or equipment damage exists Make sure input power supply has been completely disconnected before wiring operation Failure to comply will result in personnel injury even death All wiring operations and lines should comply with EMC and national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The conductor diameter should be in acc
156. it is GK600 4T18 5G 22L and the model with brake unit is GK600 4T18 5G 22LB Braking resistor needs to be mounted GK600 4T90G 110L externally with reference to Table 3 3 means the rated input current configured a DC reactor The drive GK600 4T90G 110L or above is provided with an external mounted DC reactor in shipment as default Be sure to connect the DC reactor Failure to comply may result in drive abnormal running Chapter 2 Product Information GK600 User Manual 2 4 Technical Features of GK600 Table 2 2 Technical Features of GK600 3 phase pated innii AC208V AC220V AC230V AC240V AC380V AC400V AC415 VIAC440V AC460V AC480V voltage 1 phase AC220V AC230V AC240V Rated input Power input ern See Section 2 3 current 50Hz 60Hz tolerance 5 Aisvabie Continuous voltage fluctuation 10 short fluctuation EU 15 10 i e 323V 528V g Voltage out of balance rate lt 3 distortion rate as per the voltage requirements of IEC61800 2 Standard applicable See Section 2 3 motor kW A Power output tput volt Ou 2 age 3 phase O rated input voltage error lt 3 meas 0 00 600 00Hz unit 0 01Hz frequency Hz Musis 150 1min 180 10s 200 0 5s capacity V f control V f patterns Sensor less vector control 1 Sensor less vector control 2 Range of speed regulation 1 100 V f control sensor less vector control 1 1 200 sensor less vector control 2 Speed 0 5 V f control accuracy 0 2
157. it or output ground short circuit Overload is too heavy Reduce the load Power rating of the drive Select appropriate drive is relatively small power rating 225 Check motor connection and output ground impedance Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK600 User Manual Fault Fault Fault description Causes Solutions code Display heck i Input voltage is too low ISEE PONR N voltage Output short circuit phase to phase short circuit or output ground Dacei short circuit overcurrent Load inertia is too big Use dynamic brake Decel time is too short Prolong the Decel time heck i Input voltage is too low Clee POWE g voltage Load inertia is too big Use dynamic brake Abnormal input voltage Check power grid voltage Accel overvoltage Output short circuit phase to phase short circuit or output ground short circuit Check motor connection and output ground impedance Check motor connection and output ground impedance Load variation is too big Check the load Abnormal input voltage Check power grid voltage Output short circuit Constant speed phase to phase short overvoltage circuit or output ground short circuit Check motor connection and output ground impedance Improper parameter setting of regulator under SVC control Decel Load inertia is too big Use dynamic braking overvoltage hack id Abnormal input voltage isd ee voltage Output short circuit phase to phase short circuit or output ground
158. ject to limitation by b1 05 Group b1 Start Stop Control b1 00 Range 0 2 Factory default 0 This parameter sets run command source Run commands include start stop forward and reverse etc 0 Keypad control Control run command through RUN STOP RESET and MF keys on keypad set multifunction key MF to JOG by L0 00 Refer to Chapter 4 about the operation of keypad 1 Terminal control Control run command via DI terminals Perform FORWARD and REVERSE by DI terminals The control mode are two wire mode and three wire mode selectable See Group CO for 122 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters details of designation and wiring regulation of DI terminals 2 Communication control Master device is able to control run command through built in RS485 serial communication interface of drive Refer to parameters Group HO and appendix for further information about programming Run command from keypad terminals and communication can be switched by terminals run command switched to keypad control run command switched to terminal control and run command switched to communication control Multifunction key MF can be set to run command sources shifted key through parameter L0 00 When MF key is pressed under this setting run command will be shifted during keypad control terminal control and communication control circularly Binding of run command Facio delali 000 and frequency Range 000 AAA command
159. jury and or equipment damage Make sure the input power supply has been completely disconnected before wiring Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and or equipment damage All wiring operations must comply with EMC and safety regulations and or electrical codes and the conductor diameter should conform to recommendations of this manual Failure to comply may result in personnel injury and or equipment damage Since overall leakage current of this equipment may be bigger than 3 5mA for safety s sake this equipment and its associated motor must be well grounded so as to avoid risk of electric shock Be sure to implement wiring in strict accordance with the marks on this equipment s GK600 User Manual Chapter 1 Safety Precautions terminals Never connect three phase power supply to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Install braking resistors at terminals 2 B1and B2 only Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Install DC reactor at terminals 1and 2 and remove the jumper connected at 1 and 2 Never connect this jumper and DC reactor to any other terminals Failure to comply may result in short circuit and equipment damage Wiring screws and bolts for main circuit terminals must be screwed tightly Failure to comply may result in equipment damage AC 220V signal is prohibited from connecting to other terminals than control terminals RA RB and RC Failure
160. l Protecti re Refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting functions E s of Indoors no direct sunlight free from dust corrosive gases E s flammable gases oil mist water vapor water drop or salt etc 0 2000m Altitude De rate 1 for every 100m when the altitude is above 1000 meters Ambient Environment Miu 10 C 50 C temperature Relative ne 0 9596 no condensation humidity Less than 5 9m s2 0 6g Storage A0 C 70 C temperature Rated power 7 5kW and below 293 11 45kW 2 95 55kW and above 298 SIMEIS Installation Wall mounted IP grade IP20 Cooling Efficiency at rated Amps 12 GK600 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information 2 5 Parts Drawing i Mounting w P4 holes Base plate E s Fan cover we Mounting Keypad gt lt l Enclosure Dust cover KL holes bracket 7 lt lt ae lt d Lower um Nameplate Keypad SS al Le Nameplate d i Cover po i y W cove TM M gi TUM A H n a 7 Middle casing ee oy a GK600 4T15G 18 5LB and below b GK600 4T18 5G 22L GK600 4T90G 110L Fans Mounting holes Upper cover Keypad Enclosure bracket l d ni m Keypad gs Ska T _ Nameplate a Lower cover im n gmt Il 3 A c GK600 4T110G 132L and
161. l alarm Factory default E1 13 Range 0 0 C 100 0 C Pu threshold 70 0 C Sets the threshold of drive thermal alarm When the maximum internal temperature of drive is higher than this value the drive displays thermal alarm code oH1 but won t influence the running Group F Application Group FO Process PID The purpose of process PID control is to make feedback value consistent with the set value PID control diagram is as shown in Fig 6 48 191 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ejysoddo si uornoauip eu UBYM ez 0o4 Aq peuruuejep S e luM PUBLWUWWOD unu UJM 9UJes y si uonoauip y ueuM ouenbaa jum Jeddn si qi ywi Aouenbau jndjno gid vei jeuruue jndui jey61p Aq peyoyms esned Cid Ge jeuiue 1ndui e381p Aq peyoyms esned uone4Bojur Gd L 04 90 04 Aq peproep uies jenueJeyip urep uonej8ejur ure6 jeuorniodoug jndino qid euin se7 10 03 indino qid jo euim BuueyrJ quu nd no did uie jenuasayiq 81 04 gu EHUSIOHIP Ald enjea uone489ju eun jse ure6 uonej6ej uieB jeuonodosd 8r 9 bi 61 04 enje Jeu dd 0 04 Jo jun eui pueWWOD uns pue uonoeuJip Aouenbe jo diusuonejes eBeyoA jndjno ol 21 04 9 HUI 16890 Id jueuujsnfpe eAnebDeu pue eAnisod qidald peureye peureye jou Q enjeA eniu qid jo eum BulpjoH 90 04 xoeqp Cd Jo euin BuueyJ S0 04 Bumes did 40 euin BuueyJ Kouenbaeuj jndino yndul uoneoiunui
162. l and abnormal as inspection aaa Noise Listen Noabnomalmise abnormal noise G Smell visual No peculiar smell and abnormal as inspection smoke Visual Dri Appearance No defect and deformation rive inspection No dust and or fiber particles in Heat dissipation and Visual air duct normal working of fans temperature rise inspection normal air speed and volume no Visual No filthy mud oil stains and water inspection drop abnormal temperature rise 233 Chapter 8 Maintenance GK600 User Manual Inspection Inspection JS Inspection aspects Criteria items methods No abnormal heating and Thermal status Smell scorching smell EN Observe m Vibration No abnormal vibration and sound listen Power supply input Ammeter In the range of requirement current Runnin ii J Drive output current In the range of requirement status parameters Drive output voltage Voltmeter In the range of requirement The difference between U0 33 displayed temperature and Power supply input Voltmeter In the range of requirement voltage Temperature Thermometer ambient temperature does not exceed 40 C 8 2 Regular Maintenance Users should perform regular inspection of the drive every 3 6 months so as to eliminate the potential faults ATTENTION gt Please make sure power supply of the drive has been cut off and DC bus voltage has been discharged to OV prior to maintenance gt Never leave screws gaskets conductors tools
163. l mode is selected it is necessary to perform motor parameter identification in order to obtain correct motor parameters before initial running Upon the completion of normal process of motor parameter identification automatically acquired motor parameters will be stored into drive for control operation during running gt t should be noted when vector control is selected that one drive can only be used to drive one motor The capacity gap between the drive and the motor should not be excessively big Added to this the power of motor could be two classes lower or one class higher than its matching drive Failure to comply will be most likely to result in performance degradation or abnormal working Group A1 User defined Displayed Parameters parameter 1 A0 00 parameter 2 A0 00 parameter 3 A0 00 parameter 4 A0 00 parameter 5 A0 00 parameter 6 A0 00 A1 06 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 7 A0 00 A107 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 8 A0 00 A1 08 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U1 26 Factory default parameter 9 A0 00 A1 09 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U 1 26 Factory default parameter 10 A0 00 A1 10 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U 1 26 Factory default parameter 11 A0 00 107 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual M 11 User defined displayed Range A0 00 U 1 26 Factory default parameter 12 A0 00 A442
164. l2 V BIT2 EAI V BIT3 Reserved Thousands place BITO DI BIT1 External count value BIT2 Reserved BIT3 Reserved Note when this parameter is set to 0000 running frequency Hz would be displayed as default Setting of binary system 0 Display disabled 1 Display enabled Unit s place BITO Running linear speed m s BIT1 Set linear speed m s BIT2 Input terminal status BIT3 Output terminal status Decade BITO PID setting 96 BIT1 PID feedback 96 BIT2 Set length m BIT3 Actual length m Hundreds place reserved Thousands place reserved Setting of binary system 0 Display disabled 1 Display enabled Unit s place BITO Command frequency Hz BIT1 Bus voltage V BIT2 Input terminal status BIT3 Output terminal status Decade BITO AI1 V BIT1 AI2 V BIT2 EAI V BIT3 Reserved Hundreds place BITO PID setting 96 LED displayed parameters setting 2 on running status LED displayed parameters setting on stop status 97 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory P D A arameter esignation Scope default BIT1 PID feedback 96 BIT2 Set length m BIT3 Actual length m Thousands place BITO Running linear speed m s BIT1 Set linear speed m s BIT2 External count value BIT3 DI Note when this function code is set to 0000 the set frequency would be displayed as default Hz L1 03 Linear speed COEFF 0 1 999 9 100 0 Gro
165. latively large one Contracting brake release Factory default E0 07 g Range 0 0 200 0 2 current 120 0 Current is limited to this value before the drive starts its acceleration from contracting brake 186 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters release frequency in other words before contracting brake mechanism is not completely released Accel delay ti ft Factory default E001 oa o Me Range 0 0s 10 0s 2 contracting brake release 1 0s After digital output terminal contracting brake control outputs OFF signal inverter will delay its Accel with this time Accelerated running will be started after this set time is elapsed Please set this parameter value in compliance with the time required for mechanism release of contracting brake Contracting brake suction Factory default E0 09 Range 0 00Hz 10 00Hz frequency 2 00Hz Upon the receipt of stop command the drive decelerates to contracting brake suction frequency set by E0 09 and maintains constant speed running at this frequency waiting for the output of contracting brake control signal Contracting brake suction Factory default E0 10 E Range 0 0s 10 0s 5 waiting time 0 0s When the running frequency attains contracting brake suction frequency after this waiting time digital output terminal contracting brake control outputs ON signal to control the contracting brake suction Contracting brake suction Factory default E0 1
166. ld be at OHz 2 Stop If frequency command is lower than lower limit frequency stop would be activated after the time delay set by b0 12 When lower limit frequency is O this limitation is invalid ATTENTION This parameter is disabled under PID control mode 120 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Time delay of stop when Factory default command frequency lower Range 0 0s 6553 5s Aloe than lower limit frequency When b0 11 is set to 2 and command frequency is lower than lower limit frequency the drive will stop running after this parameter value Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default frequency band 1 frequency 0 00Hz Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default frequency band 1 frequency 0 00Hz Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default frequency band 2 frequency 0 00Hz Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default frequency band 2 frequency 0 00Hz Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default frequency band 3 frequency 0 00Hz b0 18 Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default frequency band 3 frequency 0 00Hz Skip frequency is a function designed to prevent the drive running at resonance zone of mechanical system At most 3 skip zones can be defined See Fig 6 9 Frequency after adjustment b0 18 ba bU 7 L Skip frequency band b0 16 poe b0 15 ___ Skip frequency band b0 14 ki b0 13 Skip frequency band
167. le and the other supports voltage only Analog inputs can be extended to 3 and the extended one is voltage current programmable 1 high speed pulse output 0 50kHz square wave signal output can output signals such as command frequency or output frequency etc 1 digital output 1 relay output can be extended to 2 1 analog output can be extended to 2 voltage current output programmable can output signals such as setting frequency or output frequency etc Parameter copy parameter backup common DC bus free switchover between two motors parameters flexible parameter displayed amp hidden various master amp Featured auxiliary command and switchover speed search started a variety of Accel Decel curves optional automatic correction of analog contracting brake functions control 16 step speed control programmable 2 step speed supports flexible frequency command wobble frequency control fixed length control count function three faults recorded over excitation brake over voltage stall protection 2 11 Chapter 2 Product Information GK600 User Manual under voltage stall protection restart upon power loss skip frequency frequency binding four kinds of Accel Decel time motor thermal protection flexible fan control process PID control simple PLC multi functional key programmable droop control parameter identification field weakening control high precision torque restraint V f separated contro
168. lect the motor that suits the power class of the drive or the control performance of the drive will drop dramatically Stator resistance R1 of Factory default d0 07 Range 0 0010 65 5350 CA motor 1 model defined Leakage inductance L1 of Fact default d0 08 Range 0 1mH 6553 5mH be din motor 1 model defined Rotor resistance R2 of Factory default d0 09 Range 0 0010 65 5350 Lx motor 1 model defined 165 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Mutual inductance L2 of Factory default d0 10 Range 0 1mH 6553 5mH i motor 1 model defined Factory default d0 11 No load current of motor 1 Range 0 0A 6553 5A B model defined Flux weakening coeff 1 of Factory default d0 12 Range 0 0000 1 0000 motor 1 model defined Flux weakening coeff 2 of Factory default d0 13 Range 0 0000 1 0000 Les motor 1 model defined Flux weakening coeff 3 of Fact default d0 14 Range 0 0000 1 0000 Fo ede motor 1 model defined The drive needs above noted paramters to control its matching motor If the parameters of motor 1 is known just write the actual value into d0 07 d0 14 correspondingly After the identification of parameters of motor 1 above noted parameters are automatically updated and saved Parameters d0 07 d0 09 are obtained through static identification and parameters d0 07 d0 14 are obtained through rotation identification If above noted parameters are unknown and it is not allowed to perform motor parameter id
169. lected bit of function code Decrease key 2 Decrease of selected bit of parameter 3 Decrease of set frequency 46 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions 1 Selection of function code bit 2 Selection of parameter bit 3 Selection of stop run status display parameters un Fault status switches to parameter display status Shift key EA 9 Stop StOpHessEKey o e ault fasst Mole a See Table 4 2 MF key function definition Table 4 2 MF key function definition LO 00 set Function of MF key Meaning m Disabled MF key disabled Forward JOG Forward JOG function Reverse JOG Reverse JOG function EN Forward Reverse Running direction forward and reverse switching switch Emergency STOP 1 Press MMEA to STOP with ramp down time b2 09 5 Emergency Coast to stop the drive cuts off output STOP 2 Run command Keypad control gt Terminal control gt Communication setting mode control gt Keypad control press E to confirm within 5 switch seconds 47 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual 4 1 2 Keypad Indicators Keypad is furnished with 7 indicators whose descriptions are as below Table 4 3 Description of indicators ON currently displayed parameter is running frequency or the current function code unit is Frequency indicator frequency Flash currently displayed parameter is set frequency A Current indicator ON currently displayed pa
170. lerate to brake start frequency but will directly inject DC whose value is set by b1 15 70 99 Reserved Filt ti f digital Factory default C0 11 E e Seg Range 0 000s 1 000s b input terminal 0 010s Set the filtering time of X1 X6 when X6 is used as ordinary low speed terminal EX Al1 AI2 and EAI when used as digital input terminal Interference immunity of digital input terminals 142 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters can be improved by appropriate filtering time However the response time of digital input terminal will become slower when filtering time is increased ATTENTION This filtering time takes no effect on X6 DI when X6 DI terminal is used as DI high speed input terminal while the filtering time of DI is determined by parameter C2 28 Factory default C0 12 Delay time of terminal X1 Range 0 0s 3600 0s aoe l Factory default C0 13 Delay time of terminal X2 Range 0 0s 3600 0s DR The delayed response time of digital input terminals X1 and X2 is set by these two parameters ATTENTION Terminal delay time C0 12 and C0 13 can be set with filtering time C0 11 at the same time The drive will respond after the signals via X1 and X2 go through filtering time and then delay time Terminals X3 X6 and EX have no delay time function Digital input terminal enabled Factory default GU ees Range 0000 1114 n status setting 1 0000 Unit s place X1 0 Positive logic ON wh
171. load alarm threshold and its last time exceeds E1 05 overload alarm activated time that exceeding threshold outputs ON Refer to parameters E1 03 E1 05 for information with regard to drive motor overloaded alarm ATTENTION In case of either drive is overloaded or motor is overloaded also will output ON 17 Drive thermal alarm When drive internally detected temperature exceeds E1 13 Drive thermal alarm threshold ON signal will be output 18 Zero current detection When drive output current is less than the value of C1 15 effective proportion of zero current detected and the lasting time attains the value of C1 16 Zero current detected time ON signal will be output 19 X1 Output the status of X1 20 X2 Output the status of X2 Motor 1 2 indication When motor 1 is selected outputs OFF When motor 2 is selected outputs ON 22 Set count value attained Refer to the specification of parameter F3 12 23 Designated count value attained Refer to the specification of parameter F3 13 24 Length attained Refer to the specification of parameters F3 08 F3 11 2 149 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual 25 Consecutive running time attained When consecutive running time attains the value of E0 03 corresponding terminal outputs ON Consecutive running time is cleared when stop 26 Accumulative running time attained When accumulative running time attains the value of E0 04 corresponding
172. ls ATTENTION In case simple PLC program output is also set for master frequency command the PLC for auxiliary frequency command would be disabled 9 Multi step speed A total of 16 step speed settings can be realized through status combination of multi step frequency terminal 1 4 Command frequency can be switched via different combination of multi step frequency terminals no matter in running or in stop 116 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ATTENTION In case master frequency command is also set to multi step speed the multi step speed output for auxiliary frequency setting would be disabled 10 Communication Upper computer is the auxiliary frequency command source of the drive through standard RS485 communication interface on the drive Refer to Group HO and appendix on this manual for further information about communication protocol and programming etc ATTENTION Auxiliary frequency command can be forcibly switched to b0 04 via terminal auxiliary frequency command switched to digital setting bO 04 When this terminal is disabled master frequency command is determined by b0 03 When terminal is enabled master frequency command shall be the value of b0 04 ENT Digital setting of Range lower limit frequency Factory default auxiliary frequency upper limit frequency 0 00Hz When auxiliary frequency command is set to either 1 or 2 this parameter value should be the initial value of auxil
173. lt F3 10 aL Range 0 1 6553 5 D meter 100 0 Input pulse is received via digital input terminal length count the number of pulses per meter is set here Command when the length F3 11 Range 0 1 Factory default 0 attained 0 Not stop 1 Stop This parameter sets the action of the drive when actual length attains the length set by F3 09 Actual length can be cleared through digital input terminal length clear ATTENTION When actual length is detected to attain the set length digital output terminal length attained outputs ON signal no matter the drive is set to stop or not stop Actual length is saved at power loss and can be read in both stop and running 212 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Factory default F3 12 Set count value Range 1 65535 1000 Factory default F3 13 Designated count value Range 1765535 1000 The two parameters are used with digital input terminal count input and digital output terminals set count value attained and designated count value attained Input pulse through digital input terminal count input When the number of pulses attain the value set by F3 12 the terminal outputs ON With the completion of the value of F3 12 the terminal designated count value attained outputs OFF When the number of input pulses attains the designated count value of F3 13 terminal designated count value attained will output ON Upon the completion of set co
174. lt occurred U1 24 PAUS OMNPUL tETMINAI when 0 FFFF 0000 6 before previous fault occurred U1 25 Status oF OU PUNEN when 0 FFFF 0000 6 before previous fault occurred U1 26 unen HRS AMENER 0h 65535h Oh before previous fault occurred 103 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Group A System Parameter and Parameter Management Group AO System Parameters Factory default A0 00 Setting of user password Range 0 FFFF UOS Setting of password A non zero four digital number could be set as a user password by entering this password into A0 00 and pressing ENT key to confirm once then reenter and reconfirm it once again within 10 seconds Once this password has been successfully set the word P SEt would be displayed The password setting will take effect as long as there is no operation on keypad within 5 minutes or cutting the power off and power up again Change password Access AO 00 after entering the original four digit password at this point AO 00 displays 0000 and set the new password following the above noted procedure Password clearance Access AO0 00 after entering the original four digit password at this point AO 00 displays 0000 enter 0000 twice and press ENT key to make confirmation In this way password is successfully cleared and the word P CLr is displayed Display of Factory default A0 01 jud Range 0 3 J parameters 0 This parameter s
175. ltering time of PID setting Range 0 00s 60 00s 0 00s Filteri ti RID Factory default o ee at e Range 0 00s 60 00s 5 feedback 0 00s RI Factory default F0 07 Filtering time of PID output Range 0 00s 60 00s 0005 Set the filtering time of PID setting feedback and output Factory default FO 08 Proportional gain Kp1 Range 0 0 100 0 20 RIS I Factory default F0 09 Integration time Ti1 Range 0 0s 100 0s To N Factory default F0 10 Differential time Td1 Range 0 0s 100 0s aloe Process PID is provided with two groups of proportion integral and differential parameters set 194 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters by F0 14 F0 08 F0 10 are the first group of parameters Proportional gain Kp dynamic response of the system can be quickened by increasing proportional gain Kp However excessive Kp value would bring about system oscillation Only proportional gain control cannot eliminate steady state error Integration time dynamic response of the system can be quickened by reducing integration time Ti However excessively small Ti value would result in serious system overshooting and may easily bring about oscillation Integral control can be used to eliminate steady state error but is unable to control sharp changes Differential time Td it can predict the change trend of offset and thus can rapidly respond to the change improving dynamic performance However this is vulnerable to interference
176. lts as a result of noise Operating instructions for switching value input terminal gt Instructions of digital input terminal Dry contact 24V 24V External Drive 3 3V Controller Jumpe E on ee COM o gt e OC e hee X1 d i GND 3 3V Eum E EDI A TEN eg OC ES urs B SENE X6 DI ba i GND Shielded Cable Near end Ground Fig 3 15 Internal power supply utilized dry contact 38 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring External Drive 3 3V Controller EN e OC EL gg 1 LL GND 3 3V NEUE lt t o eoe EN OC oo 6 H H F 9 doo GND Loe Shielded Cable Near end Ground Fig 3 16 External power supply dry contact ATTENTION When external power supply is used the jumper between 24V and PLC must be removed Otherwise it may result in equipment damage The voltage range of external power supply should be DC20 30V Otherwise normal operation could not be assured and or result in equipment damage 39 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual
177. management Request format is shown in appendix table 16 Appendix Table 16 Application layer protocol Data length number of AH data unit bytes Sub parameter 0x0000 0x0007 2 high byte is parameter group number while low byte is parameter in group index o Rew Response format is shown in appendix table 17 Appendix Table 17 Application layer protocol Data length number of data unit bytes Range Sub parameter 0x0000 0x0007 Sub parameters supported by parameter management are set forth in the table 18 246 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol Appendix Table 18 Parameter management sub parameters Meaning of Sub PARA Data request Data response subfunction Parameter group number and in group index 0x0000 l respectively possess high and low bytes Parameter group number and in group index 0x0001 l respectively possess high and low bytes Parameter group number and in group index 0x0002 i l respectively possess high and low bytes Parameter group number 0x0003 possesses high byte while the lower byte is O Upper limit of parameter Lower limit of parameter See specification below for details of parameter characteristics Maximum value of in group index Read the upper limit of parameter Read the lower limit of parameter Read the characteristics of parameter Read the maximum value of in group index Read the next parameter group
178. mand Fig 6 53 2 Continue to run from the step and frequency at which the running stopped or fault occurred At the moment of stop the drive not only records the running time of current step but also records the running frequency at the moment of stop When restarted it will restore the running frequency that was recorded at the moment of stop and then continue to run the remanent step as shown in Fig 6 54 Output frequency Coast to stop when fault occurs d2 Time Runtime Run Runtime Remanent Run time of step 0 time of of step 2 time of of step 3 step 1 Step2 Run command Fig 6 54 Thousands place unit of simple PLC running time 0 Second 1 Minute Sets the unit of running time and Accel Decel time of simple PLC F2 01 Setting of multi step 0 Range 000 327 MD Unit s place frequency command Sets the frequency command of step 0 of simple PLC 203 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual 0 Multi step frequency O F 1 02 1 Al1 2 Al2 3 EAI on IO expansion board 4 X6 DI pulse input 5 Process PID output 6 Multi step frequency 7 Communication Decade running direction Sets the running direction for step 0 of simple PLC 0 Forward 1 Reverse 2 Determined by run command Hundreds place Accel Decel time option Sets the Accel Decel time step O 0 Accel Decel time 1 1 Accel Decel time 2 2 Accel Decel time 3 3 Accel Decel t
179. med The specification of V f control parameters of motor 2 in Group d4 is exactly the same with that of V f control parameters of motor 1 in Group d1 d4 00 V f curve setting Range 0 8 Factory default 0 Areas WIPES aE Range 0 00Hz rated frequency Factory default E j of motor 50 00Hz Factory default d4 02 V f voltage value V3 Range 0 096 100 096 100 096 Factory default d4 03 V f frequency value f2 Range d4 05 d4 01 0 00Hz Factory default d4 04 X V f voltage value V2 Range 0 096 100 096 0 0 o d4 05 V f frequency value f1 Range d4 07 d4 03 En Dr 2 0 00Hz Factory default d4 06 V f voltage value V1 Range 0 096 100 096 0 0 a o Factory default d4 07 V f frequency value fO Range 0 00Hz d4 05 0 00Hz Factory default d4 08 V f voltage value VO Range 0 096 100 096 0 0 o Factory default d4 09 Torque boost Range 0 0 30 0 0 0 Factory default d4 10 Slip compensation gain Range 0 0 400 0 100 0 Range 0 00Hz maximum Factory default d4 11 Droop control frequency 0 00Hz d4 12 Current limitation mode Range 0 5 Factory default 1 Digital setting of current Factory default da 13 9 g Range 20 0 200 0 uj limit value 160 0 t limit ff on fl Factory default weakening 0 500 181 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory default d4 15 Energy saving percentage Range 0 0 40 0 i pi o d4 16 n oscillation suppression Range 0 3000 Factory defaul
180. ment of Accel S curve should be 20 0 x 3 6s 0 72s Ending segment of Accel S curve should be 30 0 x 3 6s 1 08s linear Accel time at middle segment should be 3 6s 0 72s 1 08s 1 8s Difference between S curve Accel Decel A and B Middle segment Accel Decel rate of S curve Accel Decel A is determined by the selected Accel Decel time 1 4 not subject to the effect of S curve time span therefore the total Accel Decel time changes with the variation of setting of S curve time When some certain Accel Decel time is selected for S curve Accel Decel B the total time of Accel Decel is constant but with different proportion of initial part and ending part the rate of linear part as well as the shape of S curve will changes 4 S curve Accel Decel C The rated frequency of the motor is taken as inflection point of this S curve and the set Accel Decel time is Accel Decel rate Motor rated frequency Accel Decel time v NOT Accel Decel rate Maximum frequency Accel Decel time X 132 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters When command frequency is higher than rated frequency of motor the Accel Decel time is automatically adjusted by reducing output torque of the motor This is applicable to the situation in which short Accel Decel time is required during the speed range higher than rated frequency of the motor Diagram of S curve C is shown as Fig 6 16 Output frequency Time Fig 6 16 f Command Freq
181. meter improving the torque output 0 0 corresponds to automatic torque boost and drive output voltage is automatically compensated via detection of load current Automatic torque boost is valid only for linear V f pattern 100 of torque boost corresponds to rated voltage of motor A non zero value means the output voltage rises on the basis of V f curve and this takes effect at parameter values 0 6 of d1 00 It is suggested this parameter value be gradually increased from zero until the starting requirement is met Boost value is not suggested to be set to a relatively big one as it is likely to bring about a bigger drive current and higher motor temperature Torque boost diagram is shown in Fig 6 43 Output voltage V Rated voltage of motor Boost value Output frequency Hz 0 Rated frequency of motor Fig 6 43 171 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory default d1 10 Slip compensation gain Range 0 0 400 0 i 100 096 Used under V f control When the motor is driving an electric driven load motor speed drops with the increase of load When the motor is driving a power generating load motor speed will increase with the increase of load Appropriate slip compensation gain can maintain constant motor speed when the motor load is changing To ensure the performance of slip compensation gain setting motor rated speed d0 06 is essential The difference between d0 06 and the motor running
182. meter value of F0 23 maximum frequency if it is opposite to command running direction PID integral continues This mode requires longer time of quitting saturation 1 Integral stopped when frequency attains upper lower limit Under PID control when output frequency attains upper lower limit of frequency or parameter value of F0 23 maximum frequency if it is opposite to command running direction 193 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual PID integral will cease This mode can quit integral saturation status rapidly PID iti d ti F0 04 pA eS AG Range 0 1 Factory default 0 adjustment 0 Positive adjustment 1 Negative adjustment This parameter can be used with digital input terminal PID adjustment direction to select positive or negative adjustment of PID Table 6 17 FO 04 PID adjustment direction Adjustment terminal 0 Poe O po ON Negative Positive adjustment when feedback signal is smaller than PID setting output frequency of the drive will rise to reach PID balance when feedback signal is bigger than PID setting output frequency of the drive will drop to reach PID balance Negative adjustment when feedback signal is smaller than PID setting output frequency of the drive will drop to reach PID balance when feedback signal is bigger than PID setting output frequency of the drive will rise to reach PID balance RAT NEON Factory default F0 05 Fi
183. n same as F2 01 F2 14 Runningtimeofstep6 O Os min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 7 F1 09 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 7 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 16 Runningtimeofstep7 O Os min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 8 F1 10 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 8 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 18 Runningtimeofstep 8 o 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting Setting of step 9 0 Multi step frequency 9 F1 11 1 7 Same as F2 01 92 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P t D ti Attr arameter esignation Scope derart Decade running direction same as Hundreds place ACC DEC time option same as F2 01 0 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 multi step frequency 10 F1 12 1 7 same as F2 01 Setting of step 10 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 22 Runningtimeofstep 10 D Os min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 11 F1 13 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 11 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 24 Running time of step 11 0 0s min 6000 0s min Uni
184. ng option 0 Integrating disabled Adjustment step size is kept constant when frequency is adjusted by keys and the adjustment will be performed always with the step size set by LO 04 Integrating enabled When frequency is adjusted by keys the initial step size is the set value of LO 04 With the press increase of V adjustment step size shows cumulative integrating effect and will increase gradually L0 04 Step size of frequency Range Factory default adjustment through keys V 0 00HZ s 10 00HZ s 0 03 Hz s When frequency command pattern is digital setting keypad V adjustment progressive increase and decrease of command frequency is realized through or V on keypad This parameter is used to set the step size of frequency adjustment through V The step size is defined as frequency variation per second and the smallest step size is 0 01 Hz s Group L1 LED Display Setting LED displayed parameters Factory default L1 00 oue Range 0000 37FF B setting 1 on running status OOOF Sets LED displayed parameters on running status When a number of parameters are selected to be displayed skim through could be performed using key gt gt on keypad 0 Display disabled 1 Display enabled Units place BITO Running frequency Hz 216 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters BIT1 Command frequency Hz BIT2 Bus voltage V BIT3 Output current A Decade BITO Output tor
185. nitial value is disabled This function makes PID adjustment get into stable status fast PID feedback loss Factory default F0 21 Range 0 0 100 0 ji detection value 0 096 PID feedback loss Factory default F0 22 PON Range 0 0s 30 0s i detection time 1 0s When offset between feedback and setting of PID is bigger than set value of F0 21 and the lasting time attains the set time of F0 22 the drive reports fault Plo If F0 22 is set to O feedback loss detection is disabled F0 23 Maximum FREQ when Range 0 00Hz maximum Factory default opposite to command direction frequency 50 00Hz 196 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters When run command direction is forward while PID output is reverse the maximum reverse frequency will be determined by F0 23 When run command direction is reverse while PID output is forward the maximum forward frequency will be determined by F0 23 F0 24 PID computation option Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 No computation in stop status 1 Computation continued in stop status Group F1 Multi step Frequency Frequenc command F1 00 l J Range 0 8 Factory default 0 source of multi step O 0 Digital setting F 1 02 1 Digital setting b0 02 keypad V adjustment 2 Digital setting b0 02 terminal UP DOWN adjustment 5 EAI on IO expansion board 6 X6 DI pulse input 7 Process PID output 8 Communication At most 16 step of frequency can be set throu
186. normal 12 Ground short circuit protection at output side 13 Input power supply abnormal 14 Phase loss at output side 15 Inverter module overloaded protection 16 Radiator thermal protection 17 Motor PTC thermal protection 18 Module temperature detection disconnection 19 Reserved 20 Expansion board connection abnormal Reserved Drive lines connection abnormal Analog terminal functional mutex External equipment malfunction Reserved Continuous running time reached Accumulative running time reached 28 Power supply abnormal during running EEPROM read write fault Contactor close fault Port communication abnormal Keypad communication abnormal Parameter copy fault Reserved Software version compatibility fault CPU interference as a fault Reference protection 5V power supply out of limit 10V power supply out of limit Al input out of limit Undervoltage protection Reserved Reserved Reserved 101 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory A Parameter Designation Scope Belt E EEG S S U1 01 Running frequency when the latest 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 0 00Hz fault occurred U1 02 Output current when the latest 0 0A 6553 5A 0 0A fault occurred U1 03 Bus voltage when the latest fault 0V 10000V occurred U1 04 Rectifier bridge temperature when 40 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 C 6 the latest fault occurred U1 05 Inverter bridge temperature when A0 0 C 100 0 C 0 0 C th
187. number The next parameter group Parameter group number number possesses high 0x0004 possesses high byte while i byte while the lower byte is the lower byte is 0 0 The previous parameter Parameter group number 0x0005 possesses high byte while the lower byte is O group number possesses high byte while the lower Status parameter group should not be modified and does not support the reading of upper and lower limits Parameter characteristic is 2 byte long and the bit definition is shown in the table Read the previous parameter group number byte is O below Appendix Table 19 Parameter characteristics Characteristic Value Meaning parameter BIT 01B Not changeable in running but BIT1 BITO changeable in stop 247 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Characteristic BIT14 Number of symbols available not 0 unsigned number 1 directed available number The response format is shown as table 20 when an error occurs 248 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol Appendix Table 20 Application layer Data length number of bytes Range protocol data unit esi a Error codes supported by Modbus protocol are listed in the table below Appendix Table 21 Error codes Error codes Meanings of error codes 0x1 Illegal parameter 2 Illegal register address 03 o Data error i e data are out of upper limit or lower limit although there are in the ran
188. o current passes through 150 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Decade Y2 same as Y1 Hundreds place control board relay output 0 Positive logic ON when there is coil excitation 1 Negative logic ON when there is no coil excitation Thousands place expansion board relay output same as control board relay Wiring diagram of digital output terminal is shown as Fig 6 21 Relay 24VO0 Drive Y i e i512 COMO Fig 6 21 Detected object of frequenc Factory default C 1 09 E i Range 00 11 2 doubling technology FDT 00 Unit s place FDT1 detective object 0 Set value of speed frequency after Accel Decel FDT1 output frequency is the command frequency after Accel Decel 1 Detected speed value FDT1 output frequency is actually detected or identified frequency If the drive is under V f pattern it should be output frequency Decade FDT2 detective object 0 Set value of speed frequency after Accel Decel FDT2 output frequency is the command frequency after Accel Decel 1 Detected speed value FDT2 output frequency is actually detected or identified frequency If the drive is under V f pattern it should be output frequency Factory default C1 10 FDT1 upper bound Range 0 00Hz maximum FREQ 50 00Hz Factory default C1 11 FDT1 lower bound Range 0 00Hz maximum FREQ 49 00Hz l Factory default C1 12 FDT2 upper
189. o general constant torque load When drive output frequency is 0 output voltage will be 0 while when output frequency is rated frequency of motor the output voltage would be rated voltage of motor 1 Broken line V f determined by d1 01 d1 08 Applies to spin drier centrifuge industrial washing machine and other special loads When drive output frequency is 0 output voltage will be 0 while when output frequency is rated frequency of motor the output voltage would be rated voltage of motor What is different is this pattern can set 4 inflection points by d1 01 d1 08 See Fig 6 41 Output voltage V Rated voltage of Output frequency Hz o fof f2 f3 Rated frequency of motor Fig 6 41 User defined various segments V f curve 169 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual VO V1 V2 V3 and fO f1 f2 and f3 in the figure are voltage value and frequency value set by parameters d1 01 d1 08 2 1 2nd power 3 1 4th power 4 1 6th power 5 1 8th power 6 2 0th power Parameter values 2 6 apply to torque dropped loads such as fans and water pumps See Fig 6 42 Output voltage V 2 C power 1 8 power 1 6 power 1 4 power 1 2 power LI Rated voltage of motor tput fi H Rated frequency of Output frequency Hz motor Fig 6 42 1 2 2 0 power V f curve 7 V f separated pattern 1 Output frequency and output voltage can be set separately Frequency is set by the method as stated in
190. oard relay output Same as unit s place Unit s place FDT1 detective object 0 Set value of speed frequency after Accel Decel C1 09 Detective object of frequency 1 Detected speed value doubling technology FDT Decade FDT2 detective object 0 Set value of speed frequency after Accel Decel 1 Detected speed value Pa wal RN aa 50 00Hz C1 14 Soon width of frequency attained 74 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P D A arameter esignation Scope default ttr C1 15 Zero current detection level 0 0 50 0 C1 16 J Zero current detection time 0 01s 50 00s Group C2 Analog and Pulse Input Unit s place Al1 input curve 0 Curve 1 2 points 1 Curve 2 4 points 2 Curve 3 4 points C2 00 A Analog input curve Decade AI2 input curve same as unit s place Hundreds place EAI input curve same as unit s place Thousands place reserved zi x C2 01 Maximum input of curve 1 Minimum input of curve 1 110 0 100 0 x i t val f oo E AS E 100 0 100 0 100 0 x maximum input of curve 1 C2 03 J Minimum input of curve 1 110 0 maximum input of curve 1 0 096 x C244 e eee 100 0 100 0 0 0 x minimum input of curve 1 Range input of inflection point A of C2 05 Maximum input of curve 2 100 0 x curve 2 110 0 Set value corresponding to C2 06 l l Range 100 0 100 0 100 0 x maximum input of curve 2 C2 07 Input of inflection point A of curve 2 niput or neenon pOint OUR Vie 0 0 x maximum inp
191. og input EAI Limit the torque through analog input The limited range is O 200 r x rated torque 178 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters 4 X6 DI pulse input Restrict the torque through X6 DI pulse input The limited range is O 200 r x rated torque 5 Communication A superior device sets the limitation value of the output torque through standard RS485 communication interface at the drive Refer to parameter Group HO and appendix for details of communication Digital setting of Factory default d2 14 t Range 0 0 200 0 H electric driven torque 180 0 When 0 is selected for d2 12 this parameter value limits the maximum output electric driven torque 100 corresponds to rated torque of the motor Digital setting of brake Factory default d2 15 Range 0 0 200 0 R torque 180 0 When 0 is selected for d2 13 this parameter value limits the maximum output brake torque 100 corresponds to rated torque of the motor Torque limit coefficient in Factory default d2 16 z Range 0 0 100 0 2 flux weakening 50 0 Under the pattern of SVC speed control and when the drive is running at frequency higher than rated frequency flux weakening zone appropriate torque limit coefficient can effectively improve the performance of output torque and Accel Decel characteristics Electric driven sli Factory default d2 17 as Range 10 0 300 0 5 compensation gain 100 0 Under SVC pattern adj
192. ol Data length number of 1 data unit bytes Ck X tRewCRC Response format is shown in appendix table 9 Appendix Table 9 Application layer protocol Data length number of Range data unit bytes Register address 0x0000 0xFFFF Register content 0x0000 0xFFFF LRC or CRC CT Some parameters of the drive are reserved and cannot be modified by communication setting The list of these parameters is shown in appendix table 10 py ee Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Appendix Table 10 ets Re O O Parameter identification d0 24 d3 24 Communication not operable Parameter passing A0 05 Communication not operable User password can not be set by communication but the user password set by keypad can be unlocked by writing the same User password A0 00 password from upper computer device communication Upper computer device can view and modify parameters Parameter 08 communication line diagnosis Request format is shown in appendix table 11 Appendix Table 11 Application layer protocol Data length number of IR data unit bytes cwx iGeGG Response format is shown in appendix table 12 Appendix Table 12 Application layer protocol Data length number of Bees data unit bytes Sub parameter 0x0000 0x0030 Sub parameters supported by line diagnosis are as set forth in the table below 244 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol
193. oller ll wo lt Drive 3 3V PLC EN d COM pO L t 1 pia XT e INI l d IBI i GND Mem 4 I S ZEN We Al es eim gt oc ji 6 X6DI l Uo l Loo Shielded Cable Near end Ground Fig 3 19 Internal power supply open collector PNP connection ATTENTION When PNP connection is adopted it is necessary to remove the jumper between 24V and PLC and connect the jumper to PLC and COM External 24V Controller 24V g Drive e D e PLC reae OCOM ae dere i OC P 1 x1 GND 3 3V PERA a Yot e HH cae OC T 6 1 4X6IDI yu GND Shielded Cable Near end Ground Fig 3 20 External power supply open collector PNP connection ATTENTION When external power supply is used the jumper between 24V and PLC must be removed The voltage range of external power supply should be DC20 30V Otherwise normal operation could not be assured and or hazard of equipment damage exists 44 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Instructions of digital output terminal Instructions of Y1 and Y2 DO output terminals OC 24V gt 24V Y1 Y2 DO Pull up Resistor GK600 User Manual
194. onal injury or even death N ATTENTION indicates the situation in which the failure to follow operating requirements may cause moderate or slight injury and damage to equipment Users are requested to read this chapter carefully when installing commissioning and repairing this product and perform the operation according to safety precautions as set forth in this chapter without fail GTAKE will bear no responsibility for any injury and loss as a result of any violation operation 1 1 Safety Considerations 1 1 1 Prior to Installation Do not touch control terminals circuit boards and any other electronic parts and components with bare hands Do not use the drive whose component s is are missing or damaged Failure to comply with may result in more faults and or personal injury even death AN ATTENTION Check if the product information indicated on the nameplate is consistent with the order requirements If not do not install it Do not install the drive in the event that the packing list does not match with real equipment 1 1 2 Installation gt Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or personnel injury even death Chapter 1 Safety Precautions GK600 User Manual This equipment must be mounted on metal or other flame retardant objects Failure to comply may result in f
195. onse time but small Ti value will result in big system overshooting and may easily bring about oscillation Principle for adjustment of proportional gain Kp and integration time Ti proportional gain Kp is usually adjusted prior maximizing Kp at the premise of ensuring the system is subject to no oscillation and then adjust integration time Ti to provide the system with both instant response characteristic and less overshooting d2 01 d2 02 are the proportional gain and integration time of the drive at high speed d2 03 d2 04 are the proportional gain and integration time of the drive at low speed Distinction between high speed and low speed is determined by d2 05 d2 06 The diagram is as shown in Fig 6 46 176 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ASR KP ASR Kl Frequency Frequency 0 d2 05 d2 06 0 d2 05 d2 06 Fig 6 46 ASR parameters are normally adjusted in the following order select appropriate switching frequency Adjust proportional gain d2 01 and integration time d2 02 at high speed ensuring the system has no oscillation and meets the requirements of dynamic response characteristics Adjust proportional gain d2 03 and integration time d2 04 at low speed ensuring there is no oscillation at low speed and requirements of dynamic response characteristics are met ATTENTION Inappropriate parameters of Kp Ti may bring about overcurrent or overvoltage faults Usually fine adjustment should be per
196. ontrolling drive please check if hardware is properly connected in addition be sure to properly set the communication data format baud rate and address Parameter 03H is used here to read values of 5 slave s control parameters bO 00 b0 01 b0 02 and b0 03 At this moment b0 00 0 b0 01 0 b0 02 50 00 b0 03 11 Appendix Table 29 Register Number of Number of Check Address PARAM i Data address registers data bytes sum Response 05 03 None None ee 50 BE P 0x1388 0x000B Management of parameter 42H Master enquiry Appendix Table 30 42 XX XX XX XX XX XX Slave response 254 GK600 User Manual Appendix Communication Protocol Appendix Table 31 Register address 00 00 21 06 and 62 00 63 22 Sub parameter refer to the table of parameter managing sub parameter Data refer to the values of data as set forth in the table of parameter managing sub parameter Example Parameter 42H is used here to read the upper limit value of 5 slave s control parameter b0 02 which is 600 00 Appendix Table 32 06 41H data storage writes that individual parameter data is not saved Master enquiry Appendix Table 33 Register Address Parameter Data Check code address Slave response Appendix Table 34 Register Address Parameter Data Check code address 05 Example Parameter 06H is used here to write 5 slave s control command forward i e to write 1 to register address 0x6200 Appendix
197. ordance with recommendations of this manual Otherwise hazard of equipment damage fire and or personnel injury exists Since leakage current of the drive may exceed 3 5mA for safety s sake the drive and the motor must be grounded so as to avoid hazard of electric shock Be sure to perform wiring in strict accordance with the drive terminal marks Never connect three phase power supply to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 Failure to comply will result in equipment damage Only mount braking resistors at terminals 2 B1 and B2 when needed When needed only mount DC reactors at terminals 9 1 and 2 and remove the 28 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring jumper connected between 1and 2 Never connect the jumper and DC reactor to other terminals since this will result in short circuit and equipment damage Wiring screws and bolts for main circuit terminals must be screwed tightly Failure to comply may result in faults and or equipment damage AN ATTENTION Signal wires should to the best of possibility be away from main power lines In the event that this cannot be ensured vertical cross arrangement should be adopted reducing EMI interference to the signal wires as much as possible In case the motor cable exceeds 100m an appropriate output reactor should be mounted 3 6 1 Main Circuit Terminals of GK600 4T2 2G 3 7LB GK600 4T45G 55L B gt Main circuit terminals of GK600 4T2 2G 3 7LB GK600 4T15G 18
198. ound Isolated from COM interiorly 0 20mA input impedance 5000 maximum input current 25bmA Kielca ptt 0 10V input impedance 100kO maximum VE input voltage 12 5V Switch S2 on control board for jumping from 0 20mA and 0 10V factory default 0 10V l 10V 10V input impedance 25KQ Analog input 2 Range 12 5V 12 5V 0 20mA impedance 2000 5000 0 10V impedance 2 10k Analog output 1 Switch S3 on control board for jumping between 0 20mA and 0 10V factory default D 1 0 10V D 24V 10 Isolated from GND interiorly 24V 24V Maximum load 200mA HE Used for switching between high and low Digital input levels short circuited with 24V when Common delivery i e low value of digital input valid terminal External power input MC C 24V ground Isolated from GND interiorly inpu Input 24VDC 5mA X1 X5 G A A A G P 1 ee Terminals 1 5 Range of frequency 0 200Hz Range of voltage 10V 30V ae Digital input same as X1 X5 X6 DI Digital ge input pulse input Pulse input 0 1Hz 50kHz range of voltage 10 30V Digital 7 Open collector Range of voltage 0 24V tput EP output Range of current 0 50mA 36 N I1 I2 Analog O output Analog ground Isolated from COM interiorly LC OM 1 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Category Terminal Terminal Specification designation VORSO Open collector Open collector output same as Y1 out Pulse out Pulse output 0 50kHz RA RB NC
199. output at stop Outputs ON signal when is running at OHz and also outputs ON signal at stop 6 Running direction Outputs OFF signal under forward running and outputs ON signal under reverse running 7 Frequency attained When the deviation of output frequency from command frequency is less than the value of C1 14 Detective width of frequency attained outputs ON 8 Upper limit frequency attained When output frequency attains b0 09 upper limit frequency outputs ON 9 Lower limit frequency attained When output frequency attains b0 10 lower limit frequency outputs ON 10 Frequency higher than FDT 1 148 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Terminal outputs ON signal when output frequency exceeds C1 10 FDT1 upper bound and will not output OFF signal unless output frequency drops to below C1 11 FDT1 lower bound 11 Frequency higher than FDT 2 Terminal outputs ON when output frequency exceeds C1 12 FDT2 upper bound and will not output OFF unless output frequency drops to below C1 13 FDT2 lower bound 12 Reserved 13 Torque limited This takes effect only in the mode of sensor less vector control If output torque attains the limit value of drive torque or brake torque terminal outputs ON 14 Fault output When the drive is in fault outputs ON 15 Alarm output When inverter gives an alarm ON signal is output 16 Drive motor overloaded alarm In case drive output current exceeds E1 04 over
200. p 12 Terminal UP 13 Terminal DOWN Terminals are used to increase and decrease the command frequency The command frequency will be increased and decreased when digital setting terminal UP DOWN adjustment is enabled The adjustment step size is set by C0 18 Refer to C0 17 for Terminal UP DOWN frequency adjustment treatment 14 UP DOWN including V key adjustment clear When frequency command is digital setting terminal UP DOWN adjustment or digital setting keypad V adjustment this enabled terminal will clear the adjusted value via terminals UP DOWN and keys to digital set value bO 02 or bO0 04 15 Multi step frequency terminal 1 16 Multi step frequency terminal 2 17 Multi step frequency terminal 3 18 Multi step frequency terminal 4 At most 16 step frequency can be attained via combination of multi step frequency 137 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual terminals 1 4 as shown in Table 6 7 Table 6 7 Multi step Multi step Multi step Multi step frequency frequency frequency frequency Command frequency terminal 4 terminal 3 terminal 2 terminal 1 Multi step frequency O Multi step frequency 1 F1 01 Multi step frequency 2 F1 04 Multi step frequency 3 N F1 05 Multi step frequency 4 Multi step frequency 5 N x F1 07 Multi step frequency 6 F1 08 Multi step frequency 7 N 2 F1 09 Multi step frequency 8 uii F1 10 Multi step frequency 9 oN F1 11
201. parameter switch Terminal UP Count input 3 6 UP DOWN including V key 14 Length count adjustment clear 15 Multi step frequency terminal 1 Length clear Multi step frequency terminal 3 63 Simple PLC paused Multi step frequency terminal 4 Simple PLC disabled Accel Decel time determinant 1 Simple PLC stop memory clear 7 9 0 3 5 Accel Decel time determinant 2 Start wobble frequency 21 22 Accel Decel disabled ramp sto i i ARESE 67 Clear wobble frequency status not inclusive O 2 External fault input 68 Running prohibited Fault reset RESET 69 DC braking in running Pulse input valid only for X6 DI 10 99 0 No function 1 JOG forward Perform jog forward through terminals Jog frequency is set by b0 19 jog Accel time set by b2 10 and jog Decel time set by b2 11 Refer to C0 00 for enabled conditions on initial power up 2 JOG reverse Perform jog reverse through terminals Jog frequency is set by b0 19 jog Accel time set by b2 10 and jog Decel time set by b2 11 Refer to C0 00 for enabled conditions on initial power up 3 Forward FWD Terminals control forward running of the drive Refer to CO 00 for enabled conditions on initial power up 4 Reverse REV Terminals control reverse running of the drive Refer to CO 00 for enabled conditions on initial power up 136 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters 5 Three wire control There are two wire control an
202. played at UO 18 it means the input status of terminals X1 X2 and X6 is ON and that of the other terminals is OFF If 05 i e 0000 0101 is displayed at UO 18 it means the input status of terminals X1 and X3 is ON while that of the other terminals is OFF Status of digital output U0 19 7 j Range 0 7 Factory default 0 terminal Corresponding relationship between digital output terminals and the bits of U0 19 is shown in Table 6 20 Table 6 20 Expansion board relay Control board relay Y 0 means terminal output status is OFF while 1 means terminal output status is ON 220 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters For example If 6 i e 0110 is displayed at U0 19 it means the output status of terminals Y2 and control board relay is ON while that of the other terminals is OFF Factory default 0 0 Factory default UO 21 PID feedback Range 0 0 100 0 i 0 0 Factory default UO 22 PID input offset Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 S o U0 23 PLC step Range 1 16 Factory default 0 Factory default UO 24 V f separated target voltage Range 0 0 100 0 0 0 5 a o UO 20 PID set Range 0 0 100 0 V f separated actual output Factory default U0 25 E Pur Range 0 0 100 0 D voltage 0 096 Factory default UO 30 Cumulative power up time Range Oh 65535h Oh i Factory default UO 31 Cumulative running time Range Oh 65535h Oh p Factory default U0 32 Rectifier bridge temperature
203. played at the completion of some certain operations For instance the DASIC prompt message would be displayed upon the completion of parameter initialization Fig 4 8 Prompt message status Prompt message characters and their meanings are specified in Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Prompt characters Prompt Meaning Prompt Meaning symbol symbol bASIC When AO 01 is set to 0 CPyb1 Backup parameter value dISP1 When AO0 01 is set to 1 LoAd keypad Parameter download from USEr When AO0 01 is set to 2 dnLd1 keypad motor parameter excluded Parameter download from ndFLt When AO0 01 is set to 3 dnLd2 keypad motor parameter included Keypad locked 1 full locked P SEt Password has been set Keypad locked 2 LoC 2 all locked except RUN P CLr Password cleared STOP RESET NI Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual LoC 3 Keypad locked 3 TUNE Motor parameter OU ue all locked except STOP RESET identification in process Keypad locked 4 LoU Drive undervoltage all locked except shift A PrtCt Keypad protection CLr F Clear fault record Restore to factory default UnLoC Keypad lock cleared dEFt1 parameters motor parameter excluded Restore to factory default Read the backup parameter value to rECy1 parameter Table 4 5 shows meanings of the characters displayed on Keypad parameters motor parameter included Table 4 5 Meanings of displayed characters Displayed Character Displayed Cha
204. point 1 of EAI 1 00V Input value of calibration Factory default Coen dn Range 0 00V 10 00V 5 point 1 of EAI 1 00V S li f Factory default GATA eet at she Range 0 00V 10 00V Sal calibration point 2 of EAI 9 00V Input val f calibrati Factory default Cio es ee re Range 0 00V 10 00V fu point 2 of EAI 9 00V Take Al2 for example automatic correction is as follows 1 Set C4 00 to 2 in stop status and press ENT key to confirm In this way Al2 is selected as correction channel 2 Input a relatively low analog voltage e g about 1V via Al2 terminal and input the theoretical value of this analog voltage by C4 06 after the stabilization of this voltage input and then press ENT key to confirm 3 Input a relatively high analog voltage e g about 9V via Al2 terminal and input the theoretical value of this analog voltage by C4 08 after the stabilization of this voltage input and then press ENT key to confirm 4 Upon the successful correction C4 00 parameter will be restored to zero ATTENTION gt Set the theoretical value or actual value of analog voltage in C4 06 and C4 08 This value can be either the set value of analog output of peripheral equipment or the actual voltage value of analog input measured by a multimeter or other instruments 164 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters gt C4 05 and C4 07 are the sampling values of analog input voltage These values is for reference only Do not
205. priority of frequency command sources bundled with run command overrides Group bO b1 02 Running direction Range 0 1 Factory default 0 This parameter applies to run command controlled by keypad and disabled under terminal and communication control 0 Forward 1 Reverse b1 03 Reverse disabled Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Reverse enabled 1 Reverse disabled In some applications reverse is likely to result in equipment damage This parameter is used to prevent reverse running Dead time of forward Factory default b1 04 Bis Range 0 0s 3600 0s E and reverse 0 0s The dead time with OHz output during the transition from forward to reverse or from reverse to forward is indicated by letter t in Fig 6 11 Output frequency Time Fig 6 11 Dead time between forward and reverse b1 05 Start method Range 0 2 Factory default 0 This parameter takes effect during the process of transition from stop status to running status 0 From start frequency When drive starts to run from stop status it starts from start frequency b1 06 and keeps this 2424 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters frequency for a period of time set by b1 07 and then accelerated to command frequency in accordance with the Accel method and time 1 DC braking then start To make the motor stop completely the drive will perform DC braking with a certain period of time as specified by b1 08 and b1 09 then start from start
206. protection threshold motor overload fault oL2 could be displayed Overload protection l l Factory default d0 24 Range 0 1min 15 0min detection time of motor 1 5 0min When d0 23 is set to 1 judged from motor current overload protection time is determined by this parameter on the basis of the running current being 15096 of motor rated current An alarm of motor overload fault oL2 shall be displayed once the lasting time exceeds this parameter value Protection time when the running current is other value is automatically calculated according to inverse time lag characteristic curve See Fig 6 39 167 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Motor overload time 5p rpA 2 d0 24 10 minutes d0 24 5 minutes d0 24 1 minutes Motor current 0 10096 15096 20096 Fig 6 39 Motor protection curve for ordinary motor running at 50Hz Overload protection is performed for variable frequency motor according to the curve as shown in Fig 6 39 at either high or low rotation speed Due to the fact that fan based heat dissipation of ordinary motors become poor at low speed the protection is derated at low speed Example when d0 24 is set to 10 0 minutes and the motor is running at 10Hz input motor overload fault oL2 shall be displayed when the running current is 15096 of the motor rated current with lasting time 4 minutes Motor overload time d0 24 10 minutes Motor current 0 1
207. put power Range 0 096 300 096 0 0 i o Master frequency U0 07 Range 0 9 Factory default 0 command source Auxiliary frequency U0 08 Range 0 10 Factory default 0 command source Factory default UO 09 Master frequency setting Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz b 0 00Hz Factory default UO 10 Auxiliary frequency setting Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 0 en Fact default Unit s place Running status 0 Accelerating UO 01 Set frequency Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 1 Decelerating 2 Constant speed running Decade drive status 0 Stop 1 Running status 219 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual 2 Motor parameters are being identified Factory default UO 12 Al1 input voltage Range 0 00V 10 00V 0 00V Factory default UO 13 AI2 input voltage Range 10 00V 10 00V 0 00V Factory default UO 14 EAI input voltage Range 0 00V 10 00V 0 00V Factory default UO 15 AO1 output Range 0 096 100 096 0 096 Factory default UO 16 EAO output Range 0 096 100 096 0 096 Factory default UO 17 X6 DI HF pulse frequency Range 0 0kHz 50 0kHz 0 0kHz Status of digital input Factory default U0 18 l 7 i Range 00 7F 5 terminal 00 Digital input terminals that correspond to the bits of U0 18 are as shown in Table 6 19 Table 6 19 Decade Unit s place bit X6 0 means terminal input status is OFF while 1 means terminal input status is ON For example If 23 i e 0010 0011 is dis
208. que BIT1 Output power kW BIT2 Output voltage V BIT3 Motor speed r min Hundreds place BITO AI1 V BIT1 AI2 V BIT2 EAI V BIT3 Reserved Thousands place BITO DI BIT1 External count value BIT2 Reserved BIT3 Reserved ATTENTION When this parameter is set to 0000 running frequency Hz is displayed as default Example To display running frequency output current motor speed and Al1 sampled value L1 00 should be 0000 0001 1000 1001 i e set L1 00 to 0189 LED displayed parameter Factory default L1 01 M E Range 0000 00FF b setting 2 on running status 0000 0 Display disabled 1 Display enabled Unit s place BITO Running linear speed m s BIT1 Set linear speed m s BIT2 Input terminal status BIT3 Output terminal status Decade BITO PID setting BIT1 PID feedback BIT2 Set length m BIT3 Actual length m Hundreds place Reserved 217 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Thousands place Reserved LED displayed setting on Factory default L1 02 pur AD R Range 0000 FF7F b stop status 0003 Sets LED displayed parameters on stop status When a number of parameters are selected skim through could be realized via key gt gt on keypad 0 Displayed disabled 1 Displayed enabled Unit s place BITO Command frequency Hz BIT1 Bus voltage V BIT2 Input terminal status BIT3 Output terminal status Decade BI
209. r Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Overload alarm activated Factory default E1 05 Range 0 1s 60 0s 5 time 5 0s Sets the lasting time that overload alarm is activated when output current of drive is bigger than the threshold set by E1 04 Factory default E1 06 Protection action 1 Range 0000 1111 0000 Factory default E1 07 Protection action 2 Range 0000 3111 0000 These two parameters set the protection action of the drive in the following abnormal status Specification of E1 06 Unit s place reserved Decade temperature sampling disconnection action 0 Protection enabled and coast to stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Hundreds place abnormal EEPROM 0 Protection enabled and coast to stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Thousands place abnormal terminal communication 0 Protection enabled and coast to stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Specification of E1 07 Units place abnormal keypad communication 0 Protection enabled and coast to stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Decade current detection circuit failed 0 Protection enabled and coast to stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Hundreds place abnormal contactor 0 Protection enabled and coast to stop 1 Alarm and continue to run Thousands place input output phase loss 0 Protection disabled for input phase loss protection disabled for output phase loss 1 Protection disabled for input phase loss prot
210. r drive control a number of slave drives and needs to allocate the frequency Group L Keys and Display of Keypad Group LO Keys of Keypad L0 00 MF key setting Range 0 6 Factory default 0 No function Forward jog Reverse jog Forward reverse switchover Emergency stop 1 set Decel time on b2 09 Emergency stop 2 coast to stop OOA WN O Run command sources shifted keypad terminal communication LO 01 Keys locked option Range 0 4 Factory default 0 0 Not locked 1 Full locked 2 Keys locked other than RUN STOP RESET 3 Keys locked other than STOP RESET 4 Keys locked other than gt gt Please refer to Chapter 4 for locking operation of keys LO 02 Function of STOP key Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 STOP key valid only when under keypad control 215 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual 1 STOP key valid under any run command source Frequency adjustment through Factory default L0 03 d d Range 000 414 k keys A V 000 Unit s place option on stop 0 Clear on stop Keys A V frequency adjustment step size is cleared at the stop of drive 1 Holding on stop Keys frequency adjustment step size is held at the stop of drive Decade option on power loss 0 Clear on power loss Keys frequency adjustment step size is cleared at power loss 1 Holding on power loss Keys A V frequency adjustment step size is saved on power loss Hundreds place integrati
211. racter Displayed Character Displayed Character character Meaning character Meaning character Meaning character Meaning Ee B B B d 5 a jg Eje t PB el a PAL oe o E e B Bj B aj G 8 Bj j E 54 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions Displayed Character Displayed Character Displayed Character Displayed Character character Meaning character Meaning character Meaning character Meaning 4 1 4 Setting Method of Parameters 4 1 4 1 Parameter System GK600 series drive parameter group AO A1 bO b2 CO C4 d0 d5 EO E1 FO F3 HO LO L1 UO U1 Each parameter group contains a number of parameters Parameters are identified by the combination parameter group character parameter subgroup number parameter number For instance F3 07 indicates the seventh function code at subgroup 3 group F 4 1 4 2 Parameter Display Structure Parameters and the parameter values are subject to a two tier structure Parameters correspond to first tier display while parameter values correspond to second tier display First tier display shown in Fig 4 9 Fig 4 9 First tier display of parameter 55 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual Second tier display shown in Fig 4 10 ay we nm O Fig 4 10 Second tier display of parameter 3 is the value of b0 00 4 1 4 3 Example of Setting of Parameter Parameter values
212. rameter is current Voltage indicator ON currently displayed parameter is voltage ON currently displayed parameter is running speed Running speed indicator Flash currently displayed parameter is setting speed ON Keypad OFF Terminal Flash Communication ON Running Running status indicator OFF Stopped Flash in process of stop Run command setting mode indicator Forward indicator running forward Flash Forward is being switched to reverse ON If the drive in stop status reverse command enabled If the drive in running status the drive is running reversely Flash Reverse is being switched to forward Reverse indicator ON If the drive in stop status forward command FWD enabled If the drive in running status the drive is 4 1 3 Keypad Display Status Keypad indicates eight types of status STOP parameters display Running parameters display Fault display parameter number edition parameter setting Password authentification Direct frequency modification and Prompt message The operation relating to these statuses and the switching among these statuses is described as follows 4 1 3 1 Display of STOP Parameters Drive normally gets into STOP parameters display once running stopped By default set frequency is displayed in such a status and other parameters can be displayed through setting 48 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions of L1 02 parameters and the a key For example
213. rating of motor 1 0 4kKW 6553 5kW defined d0 02 Rated voltage of motor 1 OV 480V 380V 40 03 Rated current of motor 1 0 0A 6553 5A Mid defined dO 04 Rated frequency of motor 1 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 50 00Hz x d0 05 Number of pole pairs of motor 1 d0 06 Rated speed of motor 1 0 65535r min oe defined Model d0 07 Stator resistance R1 of motor 1 0 0010 65 5350 defined Model d0 08 Leakage inductance L1 of motor 1 0 1mH 6553 5mH i defined Model d0 09 Rotor resistance R2 of motor 1 0 0010 65 5350 defined Model d0 10 Mutual inductance L2 of motor 1 0 1mMH 6553 5mH defined d0 11 No load current of motor 1 0 0A 6553 5A node defined Model defined d0 13 Flux weakening coeff 2 of motor 1 0 0000 1 0000 Miri defined d0 14 Flux weakening coeff 3 of motor 1 0 0000 1 0000 need i defined 78 d0 12 Flux weakening coeff 1 of motor 1 0 0000 1 0000 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory A Parameter Designation Scope aet ttr d0 15 x d0 16 x d0 17 d0 18 d0 19 d0 20 d0 21 0 No identification d0 22 Parameter identification of motor 1 1 Static identification x 2 Rotating identification 0 No protection Overload protection mode of motor 1 Judged from motor current 1 2 Judged from temperature d0 24 Overload protection detection time 0 Enim of motor 1 cus uuum E J 2 EAI on IO board d0 26 Thermal protection threshold of 0 00V 10 00V 40 00V temperature transducer for
214. reduce carrier frequency and minimize the length of motor cable Line to line leakage current can also be effectively suppressed by mounting additional output reactors 3 11 4 Use of Power Supply Filter Since AC drives may generate strong interference and are also sensitive to outside interference power supply filters are recommended Pay close attention to the following instructions during the use Enclosure of the filter needs to be reliably grounded Input lines of the filter shall be kept as far away from output lines as possible so as to avoid mutual coupling Filter shall be as close to the drive side as possible Filter and drive must be connected to the same common ground 45 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions 4 1 Operation of Keypad As a human machine interface keypad is the main part for the drive to receive command and display parameters Fig 4 1 Keypad 4 1 1 Key Functions on Keypad On keypad there are 8 keys whose functions are as shown in Table 4 1 Table 4 1 Key functions on keypad Symbol Keyname Meaning 1 Function code edition enter ENT Enter key 2 Confirmation of parameter settings 3 Confirmation of MF key function 2 Invalid parameter edit value 1 Increase of selected bit of function code Increase key 2 Increase of selected bit of parameter 3 Increase of set frequency 1 Decrease of se
215. rent fault When current limitation is enabled the output frequency at constant speed may change at times and the Accel Decel time may probably be automatically prolonged Therefore this function should not be used where output frequency or Accel Decel time is not allowed to change Digital setting of current Factory default d1 13 rui Range 20 0 200 0 i limit value 160 096 When d1 12 is set to 1 set by d1 13 the drive keeps output current less than this current limit value through instantaneous adjustment of output frequency 100 current limit value corresponds to rated current of the drive If this parameter value is set to a relatively big one it will increase the chances of over current If this parameter value is set to a relatively small one it will affect the loaded capability of the drive Current limit coeff on flux Factory default d1 14 Range 0 001 1 000 b weakening 0 500 When the drive runs at the frequency higher than rated frequency of motor Accel Decel characteristic and output torque can be effectively improved by setting this parameter appropriately Factory default d1 15 Energy saving percentage Range 0 40 0 0 0 o During no load or light load application load current is detected so as to appropriately reduce output voltage reducing the copper loss and iron loss of motor with the purpose of energy saving The larger the energy saving percentage is the better the energy saving effect will
216. ried cement groove also power lines can be put into metallic conduit and grounded well with shielded cables Use 4 core motor cables of which one is grounded at close side of the drive and the other side is connected to motor enclosure gt Input and output terminals of drive are respectively equipped with radio noise filter and linear noise filter For example ferrite common mode choke can restrain radiation noise of power lines 3 11 2 Grounding Recommended ground electrode is shown in the figure below Other Devices PE PE Fig 3 24 Ground Drive gt Use to the fullest extent the maximum standard size of grounding cables to reduce the impedance of grounding system gt Grounding wires should be as short as possible Y Grounding point shall be as close to the drive as possible One wire of 4 core motor cables shall be grounded at the drive side and connected to grounding terminal of motor at the other side Better effect will be achieved if motor and drive are provided with dedicated ground electrodes When grounding terminals of various parts of system are linked together leakage current turns into a noise source that may influence other equipment in the system thus grounding terminals of the drive and other vulnerable equipment should be separated gt Grounding cable shall be kept away from inlet amp output of noise sensitive equipment 3 11 3 Leakage Current Suppression
217. rive should be derated when used in an area at the altitude above 1000 meters It is recommended to derate 196 for every 100m when the altitude is above 1000 meters GK600 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information Chapter 2 Product Information 2 1 Model Explanation Model shown on product nameplate indicates the series name applicable type of power supply power class and the version of software and hardware etc via the combination of numbers symbols and letters GK600 B AT 7 5G 11L B XX XX Master series code of product Industry specific series code A0 Z9 code of customized hardware 01 99 code of customized software Default without built in brake unit B with built in brake unit 7 5G 7 5kW constant torque heavy duty 11L 11kW variable torque light duty S Single phase T three phase 2 200V level W for textile 4 400V level 6 690V level Default general purpose series B for water supply S for drawing machine M for machine tool Fig 2 1 Product model explanation 2 2 Nameplate Information MODEL GK600 4T7 5G 11LB C 4 POWER 7 5kWA1kW INPUT AC3PH 380V 480V 50Hz 60Hz 27 9A 39 0A OUTPUT AC3PH 0V 480V 0Hz 600Hz 17 04 24 0A SINN oo O Jiangsu Gtake Electric Co Ltd Fig 2 2 Nameplate information Chapter 2 Product Information GK600 User Manual 2 3 Information of Product Model Table 2 1 Product model and technical data Rated Rated to
218. rrent reactor In case the cable connecting drive and motor is over 100 meters output AC reactor recommended Should match the drive 26 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 4 3 Selection of Peripheral Devices Table 3 3 Selection of peripheral devices Brake resistor brake unit Circuit Contactor Drive model Resistance breaker A Power W Q Q kk GKG004T22G 91B 16 GK600 4T3 7G 5 5LB 25 _GK600 4T5 5G 7 5LB 32 60 5 0 GK600 T75Gh LB 40 60 x5 GK600 4T11G15LB_ 63 3200 GKe004TI5GH8SLB 63 GKe004T3OG ATL B 125 100 2500 220 GK600 4T37G 45L B 160 100 500 gt 10 200 NEN 40 1200 16 25 32 40 63 63 125 160 200 315 60 60 brake unit should be externally mounted when When brake unit is built in the power and resistance value of brake resistor should meet the requirement as needed A 10 16 25 32 40 63 63 125 250 330 350 330 350 400 400 500 800 800 800 stated in the table When brake unit is mounted externally the power and resistance value of brake resistor should be in accordance with brake unit On the premise of fulfilling brake requirement brake resistance value might be bigger than the minimum value as stated in the table Failure to comply may result in product damage Brake res
219. s indicated by number 3 in Fig 3 9 right close the lower cover and tighten the two captive screws as indicated by number 4 23 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual M 1 iL oM m j 2 ra f 27 i J n E a l 4 A p p 47 Fig 3 9 Mount the upper and lower covers gt Mount Keypad Use the mounting method as stated in Section 3 3 1 ATTENTION Be sure to remove the keypad before opening the cover and mount the cover before mounting the keypad 24 GK600 User Manual Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 3 4 Configuration of Peripheral Devices 3 4 1 Standard Configuration of Peripheral Devices Power Supply Circuit Breaker or RCD 3 4 Contactor Input AC Reactor Input Filter DC Choke Fig 3 10 Standard configuration of peripheral devices 25 Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring GK600 User Manual 3 4 2 Instructions for Peripheral Devices Table 3 2 Instructions for peripheral devices Power Input three phase AC power supply should be in the range as specified in supply this manual Purpose disconnect power supply and protect the equipments in case of abnormal overcurrent occurs Circuit Type selection breaking current of circuit breaker is defined to be 1 5 2 breaker times the rated current of the drive Breaking time characteristic of circuit breaker should be selected based on overload protection
220. s up after power loss 1 Enabled When run command is controlled by keypad or communication the drive will run automatically when power is up again after power loss When run command is controlled by terminals the drive will run automatically only if ON signal from run command terminal is detected ATTENTION Enable this parameter with caution for safety consideration Waiting time of auto restart Factory default b1 21 Range 0 0s 10 0s 5 when power up again 0 0s This time setting is on the basis of work restoration time of relative devices in the system when 127 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual power is up again after power loss if b1 20 is set to 1 Group b2 Accel Decel Parameters Accel Decel time b2 00 Range 0 2 Factory default 1 resolution 0 0 01s the setting range of Accel Decel time is 0 00s 600 00s 1 0 1s the setting range of Accel Decel time is 0 0s 6000 0s 2 1s the setting range of Accel Decel time is 0s 60000s Accel Decel time resolution takes effect on b2 01 b2 11 Factory default b2 01 Accel time 1 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 02 Decel time 1 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 03 Accel time 2 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 04 Decel time 2 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 05 Accel time 3 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 06 Decel time 3 Range 0s 60000s 6 0s Factory default b2 07 Accel time 4
221. set with digital output terminal Zero current detection When the drive output current is less than C1 15 and its lasting time attains the value of C1 16 terminal zero current detection outputs ON signal See Fig 6 24 Output current Zero current detection level Time Zero Zero current detection terminal current detection time Time Fig 6 24 Group C2 Analog and Pulse Input C2 00 Analog input curve Range 000 222 Factory default 000 Curves of analog input Al1 Al2 and EAI are selected by this parameter Unit s place AI1 input curve 0 Curve 1 2 points Defined by C2 01 C2 04 1 Curve 2 4 points Defined by C2 05 C2 12 2 curve 3 4 points Defined by C2 13 C2 20 Decade Al2 input curve Same as specification of AI1 Hundreds place EAI input curve Same as specification of AI1 154 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters omar ee eyes TETTE Range minimum input of curve Factory default 1 110 0 100 0 Set value corresponding to Factory default C2 02 Lai LU Range 100 0 100 0 Hu maximum input of curve 1 100 0 Range 110 0 maximum Factory default C2 03 Minimum input of curve 1 input of curve 1 0 0 Set value corresponding to Factory default So bcc Range 100 0 100 0 uy minimum input of curve 1 0 0 Curve 1 is defined by above noted 4 parameters Input values C2 01 and C2 03
222. short circuit Properly set regulator parameters Check motor connection and output ground impedance Improper parameter setting of regulator under SVC control Properly set regulator parameters 226 GK600 User Manual Fault Fault Fault description Causes Solutions code Display ee Decel time is too short Prolong the Decel time the Decel time 7 FAL Meade protection Parameter tUN identification failed Drive oL1 overloaded Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Output short circuit phase to phase short circuit or output ground short circuit Fan damaged or air duct Clear the air duct or blocked replace the fan Direct connection of l Seek services inverter module Switchi witching power supply Sauk P A damaged Control board abnormal Ambient temperature is Reduce ambient too high temperature Loose connection of Pull out and reinsert the control board cables of control board Handle it with the solutions of overvoltage or overcurrent Bad motor connection Check motor connection Identification in stationary status of the motor Check motor connection and output ground impedance Overvoltage or overcurrent Identification during rotation of the motor Bias between motor Set the parameters parameters and their correctly according to setting is too big motor nameplate Torque boost is too big Reduce torque boost under V f control value Starting frequency is too r E high Accel De
223. source 0 0 No command Auxiliary frequency command is disabled and auxiliary frequency is O 1 Digital setting b0 04 A V adjustment on keypad When the drive is powered up the value of b0 04 is auxiliary frequency command also can be adjusted through V on keypad no matter the drive is running or in stop status ATTENTION When master frequency command involves V adjustment on keypad V involving auxiliary frequency command shall be disabled 2 digital setting D0 04 terminal UP DOWN adjustment When the drive is powered up the value of b0 04 is current auxiliary frequency command Whether the drive is running or stopped current auxiliary frequency setting can be adjusted through digital input terminals UP and DOWN Just set terminal UP DOWN frequency adjustment treatment and terminal UP DOWN frequency change step size through C0 17 and C0 18 ATTENTION When master frequency command involves terminal UP DOWN adjustment UP DOWN adjustment involving auxiliary frequency command shall be disabled 3 Analog input Al 4 Analog input Al2 5 Analog input EAI on IO expansion board Al1 and EAI can be either 0 10V voltage input or 0 20mA current input which can be switched by the toggle switch on control board or IO expansion board Al2 input is 10V 10V input only and the plus minus of the voltage determines the direction of motor running 115 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manu
224. sponding to C2 27 Range 100 0 100 0 Factory default 0 0 DI minimum input When digital input terminal X6 DI receives pulse signal as frequency command the relation 158 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters between input pulse signal and command frequency is defined by curves set by C2 24 C2 27 C2 24 and C2 26 represent the range of DI input pulse frequency C2 25 and C2 27 are the set values of frequency that corresponds to DI input pulse frequency 100 corresponds to positive maximum frequency while 100 corresponds to negative maximum frequency ATTENTION When pulse input is selected as the frequency command X6 DI terminal shall be set to pulse input function C0 06 is set to 24 Factory default C2 28 DI filtering time Range 0 000s 1 000s 0 0015 Define the filtering time of terminal X6 DI Group C3 Analog and Pulse Output C3 00 AO1 output function Range 0 99 Factory default 2 C3 01 EAO output function z PT i on IO expansion board ange actory default Y2 DO output function C3 02 P Range 0 99 Factory default 2 when used as DO AO1 and EAO are analog output terminals When used as high speed pulse output DO Y2 DO terminal s functions are set in C3 02 Voltage output or current output of AO1 and EAO can be selected through toggle switch When S3 is switched to the position as shown in Fig 6 33 AO1 output 0 10V EAO analog output terminal is located at expans
225. st to stop Upon the receipt of stop command drive will immediately lock the output and the motor will stop with its mechanical inertia 2 Ramp to stop DC brake Upon the receipt of stop command drive will decrease output frequency in accordance with the rate of Decel time setting Once the output frequency attains set value of b1 14 DC braking will be enabled and the drive will stop after the finish of DC braking TA Start frequency of DC Range 0 00Hz upper limiting Factory default brake stop frequency 0 00Hz Factory default b1 15 DC brake current Range 0 096 100 096 0 0 i o Factory default b1 16 DC brake time Range 0 00s 30 00s OE During the process ramp to stop DC braking DC brake would be started when output frequency attains set value of b1 14 b1 15 defines brake level in amps applied to the motor 100 corresponds to rated current of drive B1 16 sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor when b1 13 is set to 2 In case brake time is set to 0 0s DC brake shall be disabled If DC brake stop terminal enabled time length of this terminal or b1 16 set time whichever is longer would be taken as stop brake time b1 17 Overexcitation brake Range 0 1 Factory default 1 0 Disabled 126 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters 1 Enabled When overexcitation brake is enabled in case of stop by Decel the motor shall transform the electric energ
226. ster auxiliary The sum of master and auxiliary frequency is taken as frequency command Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency 1 Master auxiliary The difference between master and auxiliary frequency is taken as frequency command Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency 2 Max master auxiliary Master frequency or auxiliary frequency whichever has a larger absolute value is taken as frequency command Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency 3 Min master auxiliary Master frequency or auxiliary frequency whichever has a smaller absolute value is taken as frequency command Output result is subject to limitation of upper and lower limit frequency b0 08 PE Range Upper limit frequency Factory default pie 600 00Hz 50 00Hz D Range Lower limit frequency Factory default b0 09 Upper limit frequency maximum frequency 50 00Hz D Range 0 00Hz upper limit Factory default b0 10 Lower limit frequency Peny 0 00Hz Maximum frequency of b0 08 is the maximum allowable output frequency of drive and is indicated by fmax in the figure BO 09 upper limit frequency is the user defined maximum allowable running frequency and represented by fH in Fig 6 8 BO 10 lower limit frequency is user defined minimum allowable running frequency and marked with fL in Fig 6 8 In Fig 6 8 fN represents rated frequency of motor while VN means
227. stment value is saved in case of power loss Hundreds place integral function 0 No integral function Adjustment step size is kept constant during terminal UP DOWN adjustment in compliance with CO 18 1 Integral function enabled When frequency is adjusted through terminal UP DOWN initial step size is set by C0 18 With the effective lasting time of the terminals adjustment step size will increase gradually C0 18 Terminal UP DOWN frequency Range Factory default change step size 0 00Hz s 100 00Hz s 0 03Hz s When frequency command is digital setting terminal UP DOWN adjustment this parameter is used to set the step size of frequency adjustment UP DOWN The step size is defined as frequency change per second and the smallest step size is 0 01 Hz s FWD REV terminal control Factory default C0 19 Range 0 3 mode 0 There are four different methods when run command is determined by FED REV terminal This terminal control mode takes no effect on JOG 0 Two wire mode 1 FWD terminal inputs forward run command while REV terminal inputs reverse run command 144 GK600 User Manual 24V 0 PLC o Drive FWDo REV o e COM o Fig 6 17 1 Two wire mode 2 FWD terminal inputs run command while REV terminal 24V 0 M Q Drive FWDo 4 REV 6 e COMo Fig 6 18 2 Three wire mode 1 Chapter 6 Specif
228. switched from OFF to ON run command will be switched to keypad control 28 Run command switched to terminal control This terminal should be enabled by trigger edge When this terminal status is switched from OFF to ON run command will be switched to terminal control 29 Run command switched to communication control This terminal should be enabled by trigger edge When this terminal is switched from OFF to ON run command will be switched to communication control 30 Frequency command pattern shift When b0 00 is set to 2 3 and 4 switch during various frequency command patterns can be performed via frequency command patterns shift terminal When b0 00 is set to 2 this terminal shall shift between master frequency command and auxiliary frequency command When b0 00 is set to 3 this terminal shall shift between master frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result When b0 00 is set to 4 this terminal shall shift between auxiliary frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result 31 Master frequency command switched to digital setting b0 02 When this terminal is disabled b0 01 determines master frequency command When it is enabled master frequency command is forcibly switched to the value of b0 02 ATTENTION This terminal is disabled when the binding of run command and frequency command is set by b1 01 32 Auxiliary frequency command switched to digital setting b0 04 When this terminal is enabled
229. t F1 14 Multi step frequency 12 pice ea Ai a frequency L limit f limit F1 15 Multi step frequency 13 iui o ete frequency 1 m C li it F1 16 Multi step frequency 14 Lower limit frequency upper limi frequency SC imit F1 17 Multi step frequency 15 Lower limit frequency upper limi frequency Group F2 Simple PLC based on multi step frequency 0 Stop after a single cycle 1 Continue to run with the last frequency after a single cycle 2 Repeat cycles Decade power loss memory 0 Memory disabled on power loss 1 Memory enabled on power loss Hundreds place started mode 0 Run from the first step multi step frequency 0 1 Continue to run from the step of stop or fault 2 Continue to run from the step and frequency at which the running stopped or fault occurred Thousands place unit of simple PLC running time 0 Second s 1 Minute min Unit s place frequency command Setting of multi step O 0 Multi step frequency 0 F1 02 1 AI Running mode of simple PLC 90 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P t D ti Attr arameter esignation Scope default 3 EAI on IO expansion board 4 X6 DI pulse input 5 Process PID output 6 Multi step frequency 7 Communication 2 Determined by run command Hundreds place Accel Decel time ves place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 1 F1 03 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 1 Decade running direction s
230. t U1 01 cdd Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz latest fault occurred 0 00Hz Output current when the U1 02 Range 0 0A 6553 5A Factory default 0 0A latest fault occurred Bus voltage when the latest U1 03 Range 0V 10000V Factory default OV fault occurred Factory default 0 00Hz Rectifier bridge temperature when the latest fault Range 40 0 C 100 0 C Factory default 0 0 C occurred Inverter bridge temperature when the latest fault Range 40 0 C 100 0 C Factory default 0 0 C occurred 222 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Status of input terminal when l U1 06 ine latest Aut occured Range 0000 FFFF Factory default 0000 Status of output terminal when the latest fault Range 0000 FFFF Factory default 0000 occurred Cumulative running time when the latest fault Range 0h 65535h Factory default Oh occurred Check the information of the latest fault See Chapter 7 for details of fault codes U1 09 Code of previous fault Range 0 45 Factory default 0 Running frequency when Factory default U1 10 QN Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz previous fault occurred 0 00Hz Output current when U1 11 r Range 0 0A 6553 5A Factory default 0 0A previous fault occurred Bus voltage when previous U1 12 Range 0V 10000V Factory default OV fault occurred Rectifier bridge temperature U1 13 Nd Range 40 0 C 100 0 C Factory default 0 0 C when previous fault occurred Inverter bridge t t Wide te se
231. t gain 1 16 d4 17 v oscillation suppression Range 0 3000 Factory default gain 2 20 Volt tti Vif d4 18 VE ua ee rd Range 0 5 Factory default 0 separated pattern Digital set voltage on V f P a Factory default d4 19 UPC Range 0 096 100 096 0 0 Volt iation ti Factory default dag eM Range OU SOUS E V f separated pattern 0 01s Group d5 Vector Control Parameters of Motor 2 Set control parameters in Group d5 when motor 2 is selected as current load motor on which SVC is performed The specification of SVC parameters of motor 2 in Group d5 is exactly the same with that of SVC parameters of motor 1 in Group d3 ASR high speed Factory default d5 01 r A Range 0 0 20 0 proportional gain Kp1 2 0 ASR high speed Factory default d5 02 Soh Range 0 000s 8 000s integration time Ti1 0 200 ASR low speed Factory default d5 03 l Range 0 0 20 0 proportional gain Kp2 2 0 ASR low speed integration Factory default d5 04 f i Range 0 000s 8 000s time Ti2 0 20 ASR switching frequency 1 Factory default d5 05 Range 0 00Hz d5 06 5 00Hz d5 06 ASR switching frequency 2 Range d5 05 upper limiting Factory default frequency 10 00Hz ASR input filtering time Factory default d5 07 Range 0 0ms 500 0ms 0 3ms ASR output filtering time Factory default d5 08 Range 0 0ms 500 0ms 0 3ms d5 09 Pa proportion coefficient Range 0 000 4 000 Pa default 182 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters ACR in
232. t alarm When the accumulative running time of the drive attains the set value of EO 04 the drive will display fault code to3 and coast to stop Digital output terminal accumulative running time attained will output ON When E0 04 is set to 0 this parameter value is enabled Hundreds place unit of running time 0 Second 1 Hour Sets the unit of E0 03 consecutive running time and E0 04 accumulative running time Factory default E0 03 Consecutive running time Range 0 0 6000 0s h 0 Hs h When consecutive running time attains this set value the drive will perform the action set by unit s place of E0 02 Time unit is set at hundreds place of E0 02 When this parameter value is set to O this function is enabled Factory default E0 04 Accumulative running time Range 0 0 6000 0s h 0 US When accumulative running time of attains this set value the drive will perform the action set by decade of E0 02 Time unit is set at hundreds place of E0 02 When this parameter value is set to O this function is enabled E0 05 Contracting brake control Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Process of contracting brake control is as shown in Fig 6 47 below 185 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Run command Time Frequency E0 06 E0 09 Time Current E0 07 5 5 Time Contracting brake control i c ac I I i i I Time E0 08 E0 10 EO0 11 Fig 6 47 1
233. t is C3 09 2 and the corresponding parameter value is positive when frequency is lower than center point C3 11 DO output filtering time 0 00s 10 00s Group CA Automatic Correction of Analog Input 0 No correction C4 00 Analog corrected channel Sampling value of calibration point C4 01 pang P9 IRange 0 00V 10 00V 100V O 1 of AI1 Input value of calibration point 1 of C4 02 BS P Range 0 00V 10 00V 00V pu C4 03 Sampling value of calibration point Range 0 00V 10 00V 00V 6 2 of AI1 Input val f calibrati int 2 of C4 04 ns AEE P PATRA nang OOV OV 00V n Sampling value of calibration point C4 05 V6 AID Range 10 00V 10 00V 1 00V Input value of calibrat t1of C4 06 pn vaUe Mrd e m n Range 10 00V 10 00V 100V x C4 07 Sampling value of calibration point Range 10 00V 10 00V 9 00V 7 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory P D arameter esignation Scope default 2 of Al2 Input value of calibration point 2 of Al2 Sampling value of calibration point 1 of EAI Input value of calibration point 1 of EAI Sampling value of calibration point 2 of EAI Input value of calibration point 2 of EAI C4 08 Range 10 00V 10 00V C4 09 Range 0 00V 10 00V C4 10 Range 0 00V 10 00V C4 11 Range 0 00V 10 00V C4 12 Range 0 00V 10 00V Group d Motor and Control Parameters Group d0 Parameters of Motor 1 0 Ordinary motor T f motor 1 ue Me 1 Variable frequency motor Model d0 01 Power
234. t s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 12 F1 14 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 12 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 26 Runningtimeofstep 12 o 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 13 F1 15 1 7 Same as F2 01 Setting of step 13 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 F2 28 Runningtimeofstep 13 O 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 14 F1 16 Setting of segment 14 1 7 Same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 93 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory A default Hundreds place Accel Decel time option Same as F2 01 F2 30 Running time of step 14 0 0s min 6000 0s min Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 15 F1 17 1 7 Same as F2 01 F2 31 Setting of step 15 Decade running direction same as x F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option Same as F2 01 oos 0s 0s F2 32 Running time of step 15 0 0s min 6000 0s min Group F3 Wobble Frequency and Fixed Length Count 0 Wobble frequency function isabl F3 00 Wobble frequency function setting En teaueno tincian x enabled Unit s place started method 0 Automatically 1 Started by terminal Decade amplitude control 0 Relative to center frequency 1 Relative to m
235. t ti fficient Factory default ds 10 Eo erence ere Range 0 000 4 000 D Ki 1 000 Factory default d5 11 Pre excitation time Range 0 000s 5 000s 0 200s Electric driven torque i Range 0 5 Factory default 0 limitation source Limitati de of braki d5 13 Range 0 5 Factory default 0 torque Digital setting of E 7 Factory default electric driven torque Ranga 0 0e EUG 180 0 Digital setting of brake n Factory default T e limit coefficient in Factory default do ione rm Range 0 0 100 0 5 flux weakening 50 096 Electric driven slip o R Factory default compensation gain i o A 100 096 Brake slip compensation Factory default d5 18 DoD Range 10 0 300 0 hj gain 100 0 Group E Enhancement Function and Protection Parameters Group E0 Enhancement Function E0 00 Carrier frequency Range 0 7 16 0kHz Model defined With lower carrier frequency output current of the drive produces higher harmonics motor loss increases and temperature and motor noise rise but drive temperature drive leakage current and drive interference to external devices are lower or less with higher carrier frequency drive temperature will rise drive leakage current is bigger and drive interference to external devices is bigger However motor loss and noise will be lower and motor temperature will drop The table below specifies the setting range and factory default of PWM carrier frequency of the drives at different power ratings Table
236. tal adjustment clear ea 15 Multi step frequency terminal 1 Function of terminal Al2 Digital 1B peter frequency terminal 2 C0 09 enabled 17 Multi step frequency terminal 3 18 Multi step frequency terminal 4 19 Accel Decel time determinant 1 20 Accel Decel time determinant 2 21 Accel Decel disabled ramp stop not inclusive External fault input Fault reset RESET Pulse input valid only for X6 DI Motor 1 2 switchover Reserved Run command switched to keypad control 28 Run command switched to terminal control 29 Run command switched to communication control Function of terminal EAI Digital 30 Frequency command pattern shift enabled on IO expansion board 31 Master frequency command switched to digital setting b0 02 32 Auxiliary frequency command switched to digital setting b0 04 PID adjustment direction PID paused PID integration paused PID parameter switch Count input Count clear Length count Length clear 41 62 Reserved 63 Simple PLC paused 64 Simple PLC disabled 65 Simple PLC stop memory clear C0 10 71 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory P D A arameter esignation Scope default 66 Start wobble frequency 67 Clear wobble frequency status 68 Running prohibited 69 DC brake in running 70 99 Reserved C0 11 FINENNO time of digital input 0 000s 1 000s 0 010s terminal C0 12 Delay time of terminal X1 0 0s 3600 0s 00s a
237. tatus and be previous status upon the receipt of pressing S wm NE Fig 4 5 Function code edit status 4 1 3 5 Parameter Setting Status Enter parameter setting status upon the receipt of pressing WE when in parameter edit status When pressing WW or es command is received in such a state escape function code edit status Fig 4 6 Parameter setting status b0 02 is set to 49 83Hz 51 Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions GK600 User Manual 4 1 3 6 Password Authentification Status On condition that parameters are under password protection users would have to go through password authentification when they want to modify function code parameter value Only A0 00 is visible in such a state Under password protection the password authentification status would be first entered into upon the receipt of pressing Mi in STOP parameters display status Running parameters display status or direct frequency modification status refer to setting method of parameters Enter parameter edit status upon the completion of password authentification 4 1 3 7 Direct Frequency Modification Status In the status of STOP fault or running the drive will enter frequency modification status when terminal UP DOWN is enabled or pressing AER or Fig 4 7 Direct frequency modification status 5 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions 4 1 3 8 Prompt Message Status Prompt message status shall be dis
238. ter display status Displaying running frequency 50 00Hz Stop status would be enabled immediately upon the receipt of stop command in such a status Press VENE to get into parameter edit status get into password authentification status if parameter under password protection Directly get into frequency modification status when receiving UP DOWN command from terminal or pressing A or WT Switch to fault alarm display status once a fault occurs or an alarm is given 4 1 3 3 Fault Alarm Display Status In case a fault occurs or an alarm is given the drive will get into fault alarm display status Fig 4 4 Fault alarm display status CCL coder disconnection fault In such a status the drive gets into stop status upon the receipt of pressing and would get into parameter edit status when receiving pressing TENE command again if parameter is under password protection the drive would get into password authentification status Directly get into frequency modification status when receive UP DOWN command from terminal or pressing 2A or TET 50 GK600 User Manual Chapter 4 Operation and Run Instructions 4 1 3 4 Parameter Edit Status Enter parameter edit status immediately upon pressing 8 in STOP status running parameters display status and direct frequency modification status This status could also be entered into upon receipt of consecutive twice pressing WE in fault display status The drive shall quit current s
239. ters C3 03 is set to 20 0 while C3 04 is set to 0 600 Additional examples are shown as below AO1 output after adjustment 10V mme s 7 la 4 C3 04 200 I I I C3 04 100 AO1 standard output Fig 6 34 Diagram of influence of AO1 gain on output AO1 output after adjustment JON ene asian C3 03 15 an oe C3 03 0 l l I 0 35V 10V AO standard output Fig 6 35 Diagram of influence of AO1 offset on output Factory default C3 05 AOI filtering time Range 0 0s 10 0s Define output filtering time of AO1 terminal Factory default C3 06 EAO offset Range 100 0 100 0 i i o Factory default C3 07 EAO gain Range 2 000 2 000 b 1 000 Factory default C3 08 EAO filtering time Range 0 0s 10 0s Adjustment method of EAO output curve is the same as AOf1 DO maximum output pulse Factory default C3 09 Range 0 1kHz 50 0kHz frequency 50 0kHz 161 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual This parameter sets the maximum output frequency when Y2 DO terminal is selected as high speed pulse output C3 10 DO output center point Range 0 2 Factory default 0 There are three different center point modes when Y2 DO terminal is selected as high speed pulse output 0 No center point DO pulse frequency output range 0 C3 09 corresponds to O maximum as shown in Fig 6 36 Corresponding value of DO Max
240. this way the identification comes to an end and d0 22 will be restored to 0 Parameters d0 07 d0 14 have be obtained 166 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters after the successful completion of rotating identification To perform rotating identification please set appropriate ramp up and ramp down time i e Accel Decel time If overcurrent or overvoltage fault occurs during identification please prolong Accel Decel time accordingly ATTENTION Please make sure the motor is in a stationary state before the identification or parameter identification cannot be performed normally gt Keypad displays TUNE and RUN indicator light is on during identification RUN indicator light is off upon the completion of parameter identification gt Once parameter identification fails the fault code tUN shall be displayed Overload protection mode of d0 23 Range 0 2 Factory default 1 Determine the overload protection mode of motor 1 0 No protection Once 0 is selected it would be impossible to perform motor overload protection Please take care 1 Judged from motor current Provide overload protection judged from output current and its lasting time Overload protection detection time is set by d0 24 2 Judged from temperature transducer Input motor temperature sensor signal through analog input channel set by d0 25 The signal voltage is compared with the protection threshold set by d0 26 If it is higher than
241. time is not included in Accel Decel time Factory default is suggested to maintain in most cases Electric driven torque d2 12 A Range 0 5 Factory default 0 limitation source Under the pattern of SVC speed control and when the motor is driving an electric driven load it usually needs to restrict the output torque of the motor This parameter sets the limitation command source 0 d2 14 digital setting Restrict output torque through digital set parameter d2 14 10096 corresponds to motor rated torque Analog input Al1 2 Analog input Al2 3 Analog input EAI Limit the torque through analog input The limited range is O 200 r x rated torque 4 X6 DI pulse input Restrict the torque through X6 DI pulse input The limited range is 0 2009 r x rated torque 5 Communication A superior device sets the limitation value of the output torque through standard RS485 communication interface at the drive Refer to parameter Group HO and appendix for details of communication Brake torque limitation d2 13 Range 0 5 Factory default 0 source Under the pattern of SVC speed control and when the motor is driving a power generating load it needs to restrict the output brake torque of the motor This parameter sets the limitation command source 0 d2 15 digital setting Restrict output brake torque through digital set parameter d2 15 100 corresponds to rated torque of the motor 1 Analog input Al1 2 Analog input Al2 3 Anal
242. time characteristic of the drive Purpose since the drive outputs PWM HF chopping voltage HF leakage RCD current is inevitable Type selection type B dedicated RCD is recommended For safety s sake do not frequently close and break the contactor since this Cohtactor may bring about equipment faults Do not control the start amp stop of the drive directly through switch on and off the contactor since this will result in a reduction on the product life Improve power factor Reduce the impact of imbalanced three phase input AC power supply on PULAG the system reactor or Suppress higher harmonics and reduce the conducted and radiated DC choke interference to peripheral devices Restrict the impact of impulse current on rectifier bridges Reduce conducted interference from power supply to the drive improve the input titer immunity of the drive from noise p Reduce conducted and radiated interference of the drive to peripheral devices Brake unit Purpose consume motor feedback energy to attain quick brake and Type selection Contact GTAKE technical personnel for type selection of braking brake unit Refer to type selection of braking resistor in Table 3 3 Type resistor Selection of Peripheral Devices Reduce conducted and radiated interference of the drive to peripheral Output filter devices Avoid the motor insulation damage result from harmonic voltage Output AC Reduce frequent protection from the drive caused by leakage cu
243. tion 230 GK600 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Fault Fault ee Fault description Causes Solutions code Display suction fault Abnormal contactor feedback circuit on Seek services control board Buffer resistance Seek services damaged Power grid input voltage Check input power grid abnormal voltage Switchin i Seek services abnormal Improper setting of baud Set properl Communication port Port Reconnect VEM disconnection communication abnormal Upper computer device Make upper does not work computer device work Drive communication Set properly parameter error Keypad 32 PdC communication Check peripheral abnormal Severe EMI equipment or seek services P t loadi arame Br uploading or Bos senes 33 CPy Parameter copy downloading abnormal fault No parameters on Seek services keypad ft aro Version of keypad is not 35 SFt e consistent with that of Seek services compatibility control board failure Check peripheral CPU Severe EMI equipment or seek 36 CPU interference services fault Control board abnormal Seek services itchi Benchmark SUSHI BSMEFSHDDS Seek services damaged protection SV power supply Switching power supply 231 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting GK600 User Manual Fault Fault DE Fault description Causes Solutions code Display a mme o out of limit 10V power Switching power supply Seek dcnices supply damaged out ofimit Control board damaged k input i Input
244. to A1 20 and A1 21 is 1 can be displayed The parameters that correspond to bit 15 the highest bit of binary system bit O the lowest bit of binary system of A1 20 are shown as table 6 2 108 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters Table 6 2 d d3 a di do c c ec oo m ot e The parameters that correspond to bit 15 the highest bit of binary system bit O the lowest bit of binary system of A1 21 are shown as follows Table 6 3 1 1 ATTENTION Parameters of Groups A1 UO U1 and U2 are always displayed and are not subject to A1 20 and A1 21 show hide control Example Besides parameter Groups A1 UO U1 and U2 the groups bO b1 b2 CO C1 C2 C3 dO d1 and E1 are also requested to display just set A1 20 to OGFE A1 20 is 0000 0110 1111 1110 in binary A1 21 to 0002 A1 21 is 0000 0000 0000 0010 in binary Groupb Setting of Running Parameters Group b0 Frequency Command Frequency command is set by parameter Group bO See Fig 6 1 for logical relation of frequency command 109 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters puewwod jeuy baly paiqesip pa qeue Bof L v IX o 0 L IX O 0 L 4 IX O 0 0 00 0q puewwo bai4 9 2o 0 L 9 Bi4 uoneoiunuuo 043009 bau dejs niniw pueuuuo2 boy Ayeyixne sjndjno sixe A SIXe A pue sixe X jo uonejnduio Jeeur puewwos bay 21d xe NboJ
245. to comply may result in equipment damage gt Since all adjustable frequency AC drives from GTAKE have been subjected to hi pot test before delivery users are prohibited from implementing such a test on this equipment Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Signal wires should to the best of the possibility be away from main power lines If this cannot be ensured vertical cross arrangement shall be implemented otherwise interference noise to control signal may occur If motor cables are longer than 100m it is recommended output AC reactor be used Failure to comply may result in faults The coder must be provided with shielded cables whose shielded layer must be well grounded 1 1 4 Running Drives which have been stored for more than 2 years should be used with voltage regulator to gradually boost the voltage when applying power to the drives Failure to comply may result in equipment damage Be sure to implement the wiring as per Section 3 4 before applying power to the drive Failure to comply may result in equipment damage and or electric shock hazard Be sure to confirm the completion and correctness of the drive wiring and close the cover before applying power to the drive Do not open the cover after applying power Failure to comply may result in electric shock hazard After applying the power never touch the drive and peripheral circuits no matter what state the drive is under otherwise there will be electric sho
246. tory default b2 09 Range 0s 60000s 5 emergency stop 6 0s In case of emergency stop via multifunction MF key on keypad MF key has been set to emergency stop 1 through parameter L0 00 or via DI terminal emergency stop Decel is conducted according to this time This parameter sets the rate of Decel for speed decrease similar with b2 01 b2 08 Factory default b2 10 Jog Accel time Range 0s 60000s alae Factory default b2 11 Jog Decel time Range 0s 60000s eae b2 10 and b2 11 set the rate of Accel Decel of Jog similar with b2 01 b2 08 b2 12 Accel Decele curve Range 0 4 Factory default 0 0 Linear Accel Decel Outputs frequency increases or decreases with a constant rate as shown in Fig 6 12 129 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Output frequency fmax Time 4 gt i t2 gt Accel time Decel time Fig 6 12 fmax is maximum frequency b0 08 1 Broken line Accel Decel Accel Decel time is shifted based on output frequency during Accel Decel When output frequency during Accel is higher than or equal to b2 13 Accel time switching frequency of broken line Accel Decel b2 01 Accel time 1 is enabled When lower than b2 13 b2 03 Accel time 2 will be enabled When output frequency during Decel is higher than or equal to b2 14 Decel time switching frequency of broken line Accel Decel b2 02 Decel time 1 is enabled When lower than b2 14 b2 04 Decel time 2 will be enabled
247. ual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory 6 2 0nd power 7 V f separated mode 1 8 V f separated mode 2 d4 02 Vifvoltage value V3 0 0 100 0 d4 04 V fvoltagevalue V2 0 0 100 0 d4 05 _ V f frequency value f1 d4 06 V fvoltage value V1 d4 07 V f frequency value fO d4 08 V fvoltage value VO d amp 09 Torque boost 009 3005 009 a d4 10 Slip compensation gain 0 0 300 0 100 0 d4 11 rooping FREQ of droop control 00Hz mximum frequency O 00Hz d4 12 Current limitation mode d4 13 Digital setting of current limit value 20 0 200 0 160 0 d4 14 SURENEUMN coeff on flux 0 001 1 000 0 500 weakening d4 15 X Energy saving percentage 0 0 40 0 d4 16 V f oscillation suppression gain 1 0 3000 416 16 d4 17 V foscillation suppression gain 2 0 3000 20 0 0 Digital setting by d1 19 1 Set through analog input AI1 d4 18 Voltage setting on V f separated 2 Set through analog input Al2 pattern 3 Set through analog input EAI 4 Process PID output 5 Al1 process PID output Digital volt tting for V f disc ener INED 0 0 100 0 0 0 separation pattern Volt iation ti V dag oe enn 0 00s 600 00s 0 01s separated pattern Group d5 Vector Control Parameter of Motor 2 d5 00 Reserved Reserved x 5 04 Hi speed proportional gain 0 0 20 0 EM d5 02 ASR Hi speed integration time Ti1 0 000s 8 000s 0 200 83 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK60
248. uency command source of multi step O Frequency command source of multi step 1 0 00Hz mximum frequency 50 00Hz 0 No computation in stop status 1 Computation continued in stop status Multi step Frequency 0 Digital setting F 1 02 1 Digital setting b0 02 keypad V adjustment 2 Digital setting b0 02 terminal UP DOWN adjustment 0 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 5 EAI on IO expansion board 6 X6 DI pulse input 7 Process PID output 8 Communication 0 Digital setting F 1 03 1 Digital setting b0 04 keypad V adjustment 2 Digital setting b0 04 terminal 5 EAI on IO expansion board 6 X6 DI pulse input 7 Process PID output 8 Communication Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency Lower limit frequency upper limit frequency 89 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Lower limit frequency upper limit F1 09 Multi step frequency 7 frequency L limit f limit F1 10 Multi step frequency 8 sd Mi frequency L limit f limit F1 11 Multi step frequency 9 pa Mc M e frequency L limit f limit F1 12 Multi step frequency 10 LL MM dU frequency L limit f limit F1 13 Multi step frequency 11 MEL EE e frequency L limit f limi
249. ulo ndu asind q 9x cIV LIV utu ZIV LIVv xew CIV LIV lt amw gt c0 04 49SEC QP Ald yndul uoneoiunuiulo yndu asind q 9x 6umes jey 61p 10 04 00 04 8umes did 192 GK600 User Manual Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters FO 00 PID setting Range 0 5 Factory default 0 Select the setting source of PID control 0 F0 01 digital setting 1 AI1 2 Al2 3 EAI on IO expansion board 4 X6 DI pulse input 5 Communication m Factory default F0 01 PID digital setting Range 0 096 100 096 50 0 o When FO 00 is set to 0 this parameter value is taken as set value of PID F0 02 PID feedback Range 0 8 Factory default 0 Select the feedback source of PID control 0 AI 1 AI2 2 EAI on IO expansion board 3 Al1 Al2 4 Al1 Al2 5 max Al1 Al2 6 min Al1 Al2 7 X6 DI pulse input 8 Communication FO 03 PID adjustment Range 00 11 Factory default 11 Units place output frequency 0 Must be the same direction as setting running direction When PID frequency output direction is opposite to run command direction PID output is O 1 Opposite direction allowed PID frequency output direction can be opposite to run command direction and PID output performs normally Decade integration selection 0 Integral continued when frequency attains upper lower frequency Under PID control when output frequency attains upper lower limit of frequency or para
250. ult F2 20 Running time of step 9 Range 0 0 6000 0s min 0 0s Sets the running time for step 9 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 21 Setting of step 10 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 10 F1 12 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 22 Running time of step 10 Range 0 0 6000 0s min Aloe Sets the running time of step 10 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 23 Setting of step 11 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 11 F1 13 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 207 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual C Factory default F2 24 Running time of step 11 Range 0 0 6000 0s min wits Sets the running time of step 11 of simple PLC The time unit is set by thousands place of F2 00 Factory default F2 25 Setting of step 12 Range 000 327 000 Unit s place frequency setting 0 Multi step frequency 12 F1 14 1 7 same as F2 01 Decade running direction same as F2 01 Hundreds place Accel Decel time option same as F2 01 Factory default F2 26 Running time of step 12 Range 0 0 6000 0s min ds S
251. unt value of F3 12 terminal designated count value attained outputs OFF For example F3 12 10 F3 13 7 Fig 6 56 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Count input signal Designated count value attained terminal l Set count value attained terminal Fig 6 56 ATTENTION gt Actual count value can be cleared through digital input terminal count clear gt Actual count value is saved at power loss Group H Communication Parameters Group HO MODBUS Communication Parameters Support universal Modbus protocol Please refer to appendix for detailed description of communication protocol H0 00 RS 485 port terminal resistance Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 100Q terminal resistance not connected 1 1000 terminal resistance connected 213 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual RS 485 port communication Factory default H0 01 Range 000 155 js configuration Unit s place baud rate NS 1 9600bps 2 19200bps 3 38400bps 4 57600bps 5 115200bps Decade data format 0 1 8 2 N format RTU 1 8 1 E format RTU 1 8 1 O format RTU 1 7 2 N format ASCII 1 7 1 E format ASCII 5 1 7 1 O format ASCII Hundreds place connection type 0 Direct cable connection 232 485 1 MODEM 232 reserved RS 485 communication H0 02 Range 0 247 Factory default 5 address KR O N gt Sets this drive address 0 is broadcast address while available addresses are 1 247 l Factory de
252. up U Monitoring Group UO Status Monitoring U0 00 Runningfrequency 0 00Hz 600 00Hz UO 01 Setfrequency SS 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 65535V V 65535V U0 04 Output current OA 6553 5A 0 0A U0 05 Output torque 0 0 300 0 U0 06 Output power 0 0 300 0 0 Digital setting adjustment through V on keypad 1 Digital setting terminal UP DOWN adjustment 2 Analog input AI1 3 Analog input AI2 UO 07 Master frequency command source 4 Analog input EAI 5 X6 DI pulse input 6 Process PID output 7 PLC 8 Multi step frequency 9 Communication 0 p o Oo gt 9 9 ee GE No command Digital setting adjustment through V on keypad 2 Digital setting terminal UP DOWN adjustment 3 Analog input Al1 4 Analog input AI2 5 Analog input EAI 6 X6 DI pulse input Auxiliary frequency command source 98 GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P D A arameter esignation Scope default 7 Process PID output 9 Multi step frequency 10 Communication UO 09 Master frequency setting 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 0 00Hz UO 10 Auxiliary frequency setting 0 00Hz 600 00Hz 0 00Hz Unit s place running status 0 Accelerating 1 Decelerating 2 Constant speed running UO 11 Drive status Decade drive status Q 0 Stop 1 Running status 2 Motor parameters are being identified U0 16 _ EAO output 0 0 100 0 UO 18 Statusofdigtalinputtermnal 7F 00 o U
253. used to perform automatic correction of analog input channels obtaining the gain and offset of corresponding channel automatically They can automatically modify the measuring range of corresponding channel or correct meter error C4 00 Analog corrected channel Range 0 3 Factory default 0 0 No correction No correction to any channels 1 Correct AI 1 Automatically correct analog Al1 channel 2 Correct AI2 Automatically correct analog AI2 channel 3 Correct EAI Automatically correct analog EAI channel 163 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual Sampling value of Factory default C4 01 dA Range 0 00V 10 00V n calibration point 1 of AI1 1 00V Input value of calibration Factory default C402 P Range 0 00V 10 00V y point 1 of Al 1 00V S li alue of Factory default UM gie ee Range 0 00V 10 00V 3 calibration point 2 of Al1 9 00V Input val f calibration Factory default CAA hia tak osetia Range 0 00V 10 00V H point 2 of Al1 9 00V S li f Factory default CAE eae ee Range 10 00V 10 00V 5 calibration point 1 of AI2 1 00V Input val f calibrati Factory default CDU ener Renae NETTO ES O00 V du point 1 of AI2 1 00V S li f Factory default CLO ees DE Range 10 00V 10 00V 5 calibration point 2 of AI2 9 00V Input val f calibration Factory default CAOS een E Range 10 00V 10 00V E point 2 of AI2 9 00V Sampling value of Factory default CAO e dur Range 0 00V 10 00V uy calibration
254. ustment of this parameter value can improve the speed accuracy when driving electric driven load If the load is becoming heavier and the motor speed is relatively lower set a bigger value while the motor speed is relatively higher set a smaller value Brake slip compensation Factory default d2 18 olus Range 10 0 300 0 2i gain 100 096 Under SVC pattern adjustment of this parameter value can improve the speed accuracy when driving power generating load If the load is becoming heavier and the motor speed is relatively higher set a bigger value while the motor speed is relatively lower set a smaller value Group d3 Parameters of Motor 2 When motor 2 is selected as current loaded motor set motor parameters in Group d3 The specification of parameters of motor 2 in Group d3 is exactly the same with that of parameters of motor 1 in Group dO 179 Chapter 6 Specification of Parameters GK600 User Manual d3 00 Type of motor 2 Factory default 0 Factory default d3 01 Power rating of motor 2 Range 0 4kW 6553 5kW pe E s model defined Factory default d3 02 Rated voltage of motor 2 Range 0V 480V M dE 380V Factory default d3 03 Rated current of motor 2 Range 0 0A 6553 5A ER k s model defined Factory default d3 04 Rated frequency of motor 2 Range 0 00Hz 600 00Hz MN E 50 00Hz Numb f pol i f d3 05 S d S Range 1 80 Factory default 4 motor 2 Factory default d3 06 Rated speed of motor 2 Range 0 6553
255. ut i t Applicabl Drive model i ad d e ARE Brake unit current current motor KW 226 GK600 4T2 2G 3 7LB 3 G GK600 4T3 7G 5 5LB EX 5 5G GK600 4T5 5G 7 5LB 2 3 3 5 5 7 Built in 7 7 5G GK600 4T7 5G 11LB 11G GK600 4T11G 15LB ETA 2 7 7 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 15 GK600 4T15G 18 5LB 156 18 5L 18 5 18 5G 18 5 GK600 4T18 5G 22L B 22 GK600 4T22G 30L B GK600 4T30G 37L B GK600 4T37G 45L B GK600 4T45G 55L B GK600 4T55G 75L GK600 4T75G 90L Ew Built in optional 0 7 45 9 Externally mounted an C1 a z xe z EN T xps 7 Past as Faso as Ls s s Lm s 15 when 5L 5L G 2L G OL G 7L G 5L G 5L G 5L G OL needed 1 3 3 5 7 9 GK600 User Manual Chapter 2 Product Information Table 2 1 continued Drive model Power rating Rated output Rated input Applicable Brake a current current motor unit 4609 Pm cw 3m ome o okamarmaaonan TS E NET NN Dm m om om om s10 es f 00 RENEK UNE Dm cw 3m oe o A UEM EE E Eme m e ckeoo 4T200G 20 2 9 20 f 3o 39 Externally fe m fa mounted E E a5 m 29 m uem 289 mee m m oe m GK600 4T250G 280L EE NENNEN M aso 280 MN LE EE EE EE GK600 4T315G 355L 156 GK600 4T355G 400L 3556 GK600 4T400G 450L 4006 means brake unit is optional built in Take 18 5G 22L for example the model without brake un
256. ut of curve 2 Set value corresponding to input of C2 08 l l Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 x inflection point A of curve 2 R Mini input of 2 C2 09 nput of inflection point B of curve 2 Bd nr au DAS 0 0 x Input of inflection point A of curve 2 Set value corresponding to input of Goo Poo ee ieee A 000710007 0 0 x inflection point B of curve 2 Range 110 0 input of inflection C2 11 Minimum input of curve 2 7 A 0 096 x point B of curve 2 Set value corresponding to ee Wen ee Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 x minimum input of curve 2 Range input of inflection point A of C2 13 Maximum input of curve 3 i 100 096 x curve 3 110 0 Set value corresponding to C2 14 d Range 100 0 100 0 100 0 x maximum input of curve 3 75 Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory P D A fala default Range input of inflection point B of C2 15 nput of inflection point A of curve 3 j j 0 096 x curve 3 maximum input of curve 3 Set value corresponding to input of CG oe ee Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 x inflection point A of curve 3 Range minimum input of curve 3 0 0 input of inflection point A of curve 3 id Set value corresponding to input of ig Woe ee Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 x inflection point B of curve 3 R 110 096 input of inflecti ange o input of inflection 0 0 point B of curve 3 Set value corresponding to minimum c2 20 poner Range 100 0 100 0 0 0 x input of curve 3 C2 21 A1
257. ut voltage is completely determined by the selected analog The biggest setting is the motor rated voltage Under V f separated pattern 2 output voltage voltage calculated according to linear V f curve x the proportion determined by the analog input The maximum set value can be 200 4 Process PID output Outputs voltage on the basis of process PID Under V f separated pattern 1 output voltage is determined by the output of process PID Under V f separated pattern 2 the output of process PID is a proportional value whose maximum set value could be 200 Then this proportional value is multiplied by the voltage calculated according to linear V f curve to obtain drive output voltage Refer to parameter group FO for information of process PID 5 AI1 process PID output Under V f separated pattern 1 drive output voltage is determined by Al1 process PID output The maximum set value of Al1 is motor rated voltage Under V f separated pattern 2 Al1 process PID output is a proportional value whose maximum set value corresponds to 20096 This proportional value is multiplied by the voltage calculated according to linear V f to obtain drive output voltage Digital set voltage on V f Factory default d1 19 Range 0 0 100 0 5 separated pattern 0 0 When 0 is selected at d1 18 the output voltage will be determined by d1 19 Voltage variation time on Factory default d1 20 Range 0 00s 600 00s 7 V f separated pattern 0
258. utput function completed 3 Drive is running 4 Drive in OHz running no output at stop 5 Drive in OHz running output at stop 6 Running direction 7 Frequency attained 8 Upper limit frequency attained 9 Lower limit frequency attained 10 Frequency higher than FDT 1 Expansion board relay output 11 Frequency higher than FDT 2 function 12 Reserved 13 Torque limited 14 Fault output 15 Alarm output 16 Drive motor overloaded alarm 17 Drive thermal alarm 18 Zero current detection 21 Motor 1 2 indication 22 Set count value attained a ee Chapter 5 List of Parameters GK600 User Manual Factory A Parameter Designation Scope default 23 Designated count value attained 24 Length attained 25 Consecutive running time attained 26 Accumulative running time attained 27 Contracting brake control 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 PLC step completed 31 PLC cycle completed 32 Wobble frequency attains to upper or lower limit frequency 33 99 Reserved C1 04 Y1 output delay time 0 0s 3600 0s 00s a C1 05 Y2 output delay time 0 0s 3600 0s 00s a C1 06 CODE board relay output delay 0 0s 3600 0s ow a time C1 07 oo board relay output delay 0 0s 3600 0s o a Unit s place Y1 0 Positive logic 1 Negative logic Decade Y2 same as unit s place C1 08 Enabled state of digital output Eiindredssplacescontral board relay output same as unit s place Thousands place expansion b
259. utput ground ground short circuit protection impedance Motor insulation Checkitsenotor abnormal Inverter module Seek services 228 Select variable frequency motor GK600 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Fault Fault ee Fault description Causes Solutions code Display amma Output enis soe Seek services current is too big Serious voltage imbalance among three phases of power supply Input power Abnormal bus supply abnormal Seek services capacitance Check power grid voltage Abnormal input wiring of Check power supply power supply input wiring Motor cable connection SER ENIE OR abnormal Output phase Imbalance among motor Check or replace the loss three phases motor Incorrect setting of vector Correctly set vector control parameters control parameters Handle it with the Overcurrent methods for overcurrent 15 oL3 Input power supply Check input power grid Inverter module abnormal voltage overload protection Motor output abnormal Eee mere ud motor connection Inverter module Seek services abnormal Ambient temperature is Drop ambient too high temperature Fan damaged Replace the fan Heat sink l l Air duct blocked Clear air duct thermal j Temperature sensor protection p Seek services abnormal Inverter module Seek services abnormal Motor PTC Ambient temperature is Drop ambient thermal too high temperature protection Improper setting of motor Correctly set motor thermal
260. ve gases explosive gases or other harmful gases Prevent drilling residues wire ends and screws falling into drive Ventilation part of the drive should be installed outside from harsh environment e g textile facilities with fiber particles and chemical facilities filled with corrosive gases 3 2 Minimum Mounting Clearances To ensure favorable heat dissipation mount the drive upright on a flat vertical and level surface as per Fig 3 1 For installation inside cabinet the product shall be mounted side by side to the greatest extent while adequate surrounding space shall be preserved for favorable heat dissipation bn yp vi J Ventilation clearance gt 100mm mge z PA IN Oo P n onn i GiAK JOU s 9000 AARADRAA N di Xe UII A Mt EN m e J ee j K J Ventilation 230mm 230mm clearance 2100mm NR ie QU m Fig 3 1 Minimum mounting clearances of GK600 4T15G 18 5LB and b
261. vious fault the fault sequence before previous fault previous fault latest fault See Chapter 7 for details of fault codes 224 GK600 User Manual Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 7 1 Fault Causes and Troubleshooting Once drive fault occurs please identify the causes of fault carefully and make a detailed record of fault symptom To seek services please contact the dealer Parameters U1 00 U1 09 and U1 18 are used to view the records of the latest the previous and before previous faults Faults are recorded with numeric codes 0 45 while the fault information that corresponds to each numeric fault code is specified in the table below Table of Fault Codes Fault Fault a Fault description Causes Solutions code Display Torque boost is too big Reduce torque boost under V f control value Em H i Drop starting frequency Accel time is too short Prolong the Accel time Set the parameters correctly according to motor nameplate Motor parameters are improperly set Accel Output short circuit overcurrent phase to phase short circuit or output ground Check motor connection and output ground impedance short circuit Overload is too heavy Reduce the load Inappropriate V f curve tl under V f control Set V f curve correctly Reduce current limited value or start through speed search Restart the rotating motor Output short circuit Constant speed phase to phase short overcurrent circu
262. with the purpose of preventing drive fault as a result of overcurrent caused by excessive distributed capacitance An output filter is optional depending on field Chapter 1 Safety Precautions GK600 User Manual requirements Be sure not to mount phase shifting capacitor or surge absorber at output side of the drive since this may result in drive damage as a result of over temperature 1 2 5 Insulation of the motor In view of the fact that the drive output is PWM high frequency chopping voltage accompanied by higher harmonics the noise temperature rise and vibration of the motor is higher compared with sinusoidal voltage Particularly this debases motor insulation Therefore the motor should be subjected to insulation inspection before initial use or reuse after being stored for a long period of time The motor in regular service should also be subjected to regular insulation inspection so as to avoid the drive damage as a result of motor insulation damage A 500V voltage mode mega ohmmeter is recommended to use for the measurement of the motor insulation during which it is essential to disconnect the motor from the drive Normally the insulation resistance of the motor should be bigger than 5MQ 1 2 6 Derating Due to the thin air in high altitude areas the radiating performance of the drive with forced air cooling may degrade while the electrolyte of electrolytic capacitors is more volatile which can result in reduction in product life D
263. write parameters and different parameters determine different operation requests Parameters operations supported by inverter Modbus protocol are as shown in the table below Appendix Table 4 Parameters Meaning of parameter Read drive functional parameters and running status parameters Ro Over write individual drive functional parameters or control X parameters which are not saved on power loss Over write multiple drive functional parameters or control parameters which are not saved on power loss and save them to non volatile storage unit Functional parameters control parameters and status parameters of the drive are all mapped to read write register of Modbus Read write characteristics and range of parameters comply with the instructions of user manual of the drive Group numbers of drive parameters are mapped as high byte of register address while in group indexes are mapped as low byte of register address Drive control parameters and status parameters are all virtualized as drive parameter groups The corresponding relations between parameter group numbers and their high bytes of register address are as shown in table below Appendix Table 5 High byte register addresses mapped from parameter group numbers Parameter Mapping register Mapping register Parameter group group address high byte address high byte w ow FH 9 241 Appendix Communication Protocol GK600 User Manual Parameter Mapping register
264. xiliary command Frequency command pattern 3 Switch between master frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result 4 Switch between auxiliary frequency command and master amp auxiliary computation result 0 Digital setting b0 02 A V adjustment on keypad b0 01 Master frequency command source 1 Digital setting b0 02 terminal x UP DOWN adjustment 2 Analog input AI1 66 x x x x x x x x x x x x x GK600 User Manual Chapter 5 List of Parameters Factory P t D A arameter esignation Scope default 3 Analog input AI2 4 Analog input EAI on IO expansion 5 X6 DI pulse input 6 Process PID output 8 Multi step speed 9 Communication L limit fi limi b0 02 Digital setting of master frequency um Fequeuey e epee AMU 50 00Hz 0 No command 1 Digital setting b0 04 A V adjustment on keypad Digital setting b0 04 terminal UP DOWN adjustment Analog input AI1 Auxiliary frequency command Analog input AI2 b0 03 l l x source Analog input EAI on IO expansion board X6 DI pulse input Process PID output PLC Multi step speed 10 Communication L limit f e imi b0 04 Digital setting of auxiliary frequency quency eene DS CE 0 00Hz A T 0 Relative to maximum frequency Pee AOR on aaa aed Weave 1 Relative to master frequency b0 06 Coeff of auxiliary frequency 0 0 100 0 100 0 x 0 Master auxiliary Computation of master and 1 Master auxiliary b0 07
265. y generated during Decel into heat energy by increasing magnetic flux so as to attain rapid stop If this parameter is enabled the Decel time will be shortened If overexcitation brake is disabled the Decel current of motor will decrease and the Decel time will be lengthened b1 18 Dynamic brake Range 0 1 Factory default 0 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When dynamic brake is enabled the electric energy generated during Decel shall be converted into heat energy consumed by brake resistor so as to attain rapid Decel This brake method applies to brake of high inertia load or the situations that require quick stop In such a case it is necessary to select appropriate dynamic brake resistor and brake unit The drives equal and below 15kW are provided with a standard built in brake unit Built in brake unit is optional for drives 18 5kKW 45kW Dynamic brake Factory default b1 19 7 Range 650V 750V b threshold voltage 720V This parameter takes effect only to the drives with built in brake unit If b1 18 is set to 1 when bus voltage of drive attains the value of b1 19 dynamic brake shall perform The energy shall be rapidly consumed through brake resistor This value is used to regulate the brake effect of brake unit Auto restart when power u b1 20 5 i Range 0 1 Factory default 0 again after power loss Defines the drive status when power up again after power loss during running 0 Disabled The drive will not run automatically when power i

User Manual of GK600 Series General Purpose AC Motor Drives

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents